Automatic date update in version.in
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine-specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762
763 @item
764 How GNU properties are merged.
765
766 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
769
770 @smallexample
771 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
775 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778 @smallexample
779 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
780 @end smallexample
781
782 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
783 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
785 @end itemize
786
787 @cindex link map discarded
788 @kindex --print-map-discarded
789 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790 @item --print-map-discarded
791 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793 in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
795 @kindex -n
796 @cindex read-only text
797 @cindex NMAGIC
798 @kindex --nmagic
799 @item -n
800 @itemx --nmagic
801 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
804
805 @kindex -N
806 @kindex --omagic
807 @cindex read/write from cmd line
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item -N
810 @itemx --omagic
811 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
812 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
814 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816 specification published by Microsoft.
817
818 @kindex --no-omagic
819 @cindex OMAGIC
820 @item --no-omagic
821 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
825
826 @kindex -o @var{output}
827 @kindex --output=@var{output}
828 @cindex naming the output file
829 @item -o @var{output}
830 @itemx --output=@var{output}
831 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
832 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835 @kindex -O @var{level}
836 @cindex generating optimized output
837 @item -O @var{level}
838 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
839 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
840 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
845
846 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
847 @item -plugin @var{name}
848 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852 wish.
853
854 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
858 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
859 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
860 just copy in the newest one.
861
862 @kindex --push-state
863 @cindex push state governing input file handling
864 @item --push-state
865 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879 something as follows:
880
881 @smallexample
882 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883 @end smallexample
884
885 @kindex --pop-state
886 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
887 @item --pop-state
888 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889 flags governing input file handling.
890
891 @kindex -q
892 @kindex --emit-relocs
893 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
894 @item -q
895 @itemx --emit-relocs
896 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
897 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899 in larger executables.
900
901 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
903 @kindex --force-dynamic
904 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905 @item --force-dynamic
906 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907 to VxWorks targets.
908
909 @cindex partial link
910 @cindex relocatable output
911 @kindex -r
912 @kindex --relocatable
913 @item -r
914 @itemx --relocatable
915 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
916 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
917 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919 @code{OMAGIC}.
920 @c ; see @option{-N}.
921 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
925 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929 with input files in other formats at all.
930
931 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933 @kindex -R @var{file}
934 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935 @cindex symbol-only input
936 @item -R @var{filename}
937 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941 programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
943 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
944 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
945 the @option{-rpath} option.
946
947 @kindex -s
948 @kindex --strip-all
949 @cindex strip all symbols
950 @item -s
951 @itemx --strip-all
952 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954 @kindex -S
955 @kindex --strip-debug
956 @cindex strip debugger symbols
957 @item -S
958 @itemx --strip-debug
959 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
961 @kindex --strip-discarded
962 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
963 @item --strip-discarded
964 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
965 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966 Enabled by default.
967
968 @kindex -t
969 @kindex --trace
970 @cindex input files, displaying
971 @item -t
972 @itemx --trace
973 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977 a linker bug report.
978
979 @kindex -T @var{script}
980 @kindex --script=@var{script}
981 @cindex script files
982 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
983 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
985 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
986 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
987 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990 options accumulate.
991
992 @kindex -dT @var{script}
993 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994 @cindex script files
995 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006 @samp{gcc}).
1007
1008 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex undefined symbol
1011 @item -u @var{symbol}
1012 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
1019 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022 instead.
1023
1024 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025 @cindex symbols, require defined
1026 @cindex defined symbol
1027 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
1035 @kindex -Ur
1036 @cindex constructors
1037 @item -Ur
1038 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1040 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1041 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045 @samp{-r} for the others.
1046
1047 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048 @cindex orphan sections
1049 @cindex sections, orphan
1050 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056 @table @code
1057 @item place
1058 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1060 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1061
1062 @item discard
1063 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066 @item warn
1067 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068 issue a warning.
1069
1070 @item error
1071 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072 @end table
1073
1074 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
1076 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084 in a linker script.
1085
1086 @kindex -v
1087 @kindex -V
1088 @kindex --version
1089 @cindex version
1090 @item -v
1091 @itemx --version
1092 @itemx -V
1093 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1094 lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096 @kindex -x
1097 @kindex --discard-all
1098 @cindex deleting local symbols
1099 @item -x
1100 @itemx --discard-all
1101 Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103 @kindex -X
1104 @kindex --discard-locals
1105 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1106 @item -X
1107 @itemx --discard-locals
1108 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1111
1112 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114 @cindex symbol tracing
1115 @item -y @var{symbol}
1116 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119 to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1125 @item -Y @var{path}
1126 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127 for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130 @item -z @var{keyword}
1131 The recognized keywords are:
1132 @table @samp
1133
1134 @item bndplt
1135 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
1149 @item cet-report=none
1150 @itemx cet-report=warning
1151 @itemx cet-report=error
1152 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
1164 @item combreloc
1165 @itemx nocombreloc
1166 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1168
1169 @item common
1170 @itemx nocommon
1171 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177 using pages of this size.
1178
1179 @item defs
1180 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1183
1184 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192 these options.
1193
1194 @item execstack
1195 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
1197 @item global
1198 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
1202 @item globalaudit
1203 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1207 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1208 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1209
1210 @item ibtplt
1211 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
1214 @item ibt
1215 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
1219 @item initfirst
1220 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225 objects.
1226
1227 @item interpose
1228 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230 libraries not so marked.
1231
1232 @item lazy
1233 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236 Lazy binding is the default.
1237
1238 @item loadfltr
1239 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1240
1241 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1243
1244 @item muldefs
1245 Allow multiple definitions.
1246
1247 @item nocopyreloc
1248 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1250
1251 @item nodefaultlib
1252 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253 should ignore any default library search paths.
1254
1255 @item nodelete
1256 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1257
1258 @item nodlopen
1259 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1260
1261 @item nodump
1262 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1263
1264 @item noexecstack
1265 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
1267 @item noextern-protected-data
1268 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273 i386 and x86-64.
1274
1275 @item noreloc-overflow
1276 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1279
1280 @item now
1281 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1283 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285 called.
1286
1287 @item origin
1288 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1289
1290 @item relro
1291 @itemx norelro
1292 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1296 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1297
1298 @item separate-code
1299 @itemx noseparate-code
1300 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
1305 @item shstk
1306 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1309
1310 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1311 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1312 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
1315 @item text
1316 @itemx notext
1317 @itemx textoff
1318 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1321
1322 @item undefs
1323 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
1327 @end table
1328
1329 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1330
1331 @kindex -(
1332 @cindex groups of archives
1333 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1334 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1344 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1345 resolved.
1346
1347 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349 more archives.
1350
1351 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1356 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1357 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361 restore the old behaviour.
1362
1363 @kindex --as-needed
1364 @kindex --no-as-needed
1365 @item --as-needed
1366 @itemx --no-as-needed
1367 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1368 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1369 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1371 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1372 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1374 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1376 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1380
1381 @kindex --add-needed
1382 @kindex --no-add-needed
1383 @item --add-needed
1384 @itemx --no-add-needed
1385 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1389
1390 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1392 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394 @kindex -Bdynamic
1395 @kindex -dy
1396 @kindex -call_shared
1397 @item -Bdynamic
1398 @itemx -dy
1399 @itemx -call_shared
1400 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1405 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1406
1407 @kindex -Bgroup
1408 @item -Bgroup
1409 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1412 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1414
1415 @kindex -Bstatic
1416 @kindex -dn
1417 @kindex -non_shared
1418 @kindex -static
1419 @item -Bstatic
1420 @itemx -dn
1421 @itemx -non_shared
1422 @itemx -static
1423 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1427 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1428 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1432 libraries.
1433
1434 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1435 @item -Bsymbolic
1436 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1439 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1440 platforms which support shared libraries.
1441
1442 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1443 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1444 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1445 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1446 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1447 libraries.
1448
1449 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1450 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1451 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1452 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1453 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1454 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1455 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1456 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1457 which support shared libraries.
1458
1459 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1460 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1461
1462 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1463 @item --dynamic-list-data
1464 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1465
1466 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1467 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1468 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1469 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1470
1471 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1472 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1473 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1474
1475 @kindex --check-sections
1476 @kindex --no-check-sections
1477 @item --check-sections
1478 @itemx --no-check-sections
1479 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1480 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1481 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1482 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1483 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1484 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1485 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1486 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1487 option.
1488
1489 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1490 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1491 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1492 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1493 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1494 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1495 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1496 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1497 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1498 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1499 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1500 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1501
1502 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1503 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1504 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1505 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1506 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1507 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1508 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1509 symbols.
1510
1511 @cindex cross reference table
1512 @kindex --cref
1513 @item --cref
1514 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1515 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1516 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1517
1518 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1519 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1520 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1521 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1522 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1523 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1524 symbol are listed.
1525
1526 @cindex common allocation
1527 @kindex --no-define-common
1528 @item --no-define-common
1529 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1530 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1531 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1532
1533 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1534 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1535 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1536 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1537 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1538 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1539 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1540 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1541 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1542 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1543
1544 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1545 @cindex section groups
1546 @cindex COMDAT
1547 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1548 @item --force-group-allocation
1549 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1550 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1551 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1552 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1553 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1554 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1555
1556 @cindex symbols, from command line
1557 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1558 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1559 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1560 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1561 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1562 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1563 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1564 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1565 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1566 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1567 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1568 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1569
1570 @cindex demangling, from command line
1571 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1572 @kindex --no-demangle
1573 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1574 @itemx --no-demangle
1575 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1576 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1577 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1578 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1579 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1580 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1581 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1582 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1583 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1584
1585 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1586 @kindex -I@var{file}
1587 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1588 @item -I@var{file}
1589 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1590 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1591 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1592 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1593 doing.
1594
1595 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1596 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1597 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1598 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1599 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1600 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1601
1602 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1603 @item --embedded-relocs
1604 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1605 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1606 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1607 targets.
1608
1609 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1610 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1611 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1612 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1613
1614 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1615 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1616 @item --fatal-warnings
1617 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1618 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1619 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1620
1621 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1622 @item --force-exe-suffix
1623 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1624
1625 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1626 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1627 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1628 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1629 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1630 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1631
1632 @kindex --gc-sections
1633 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1634 @cindex garbage collection
1635 @item --gc-sections
1636 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1637 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1638 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1639 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1640 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1641 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1642 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1643
1644 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1645 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1646 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1647 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1648 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1649 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1650 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1651 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1652 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1653 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1654
1655 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1656 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1657 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1658 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1659 command in the linker script.
1660
1661 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1662 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1663 @cindex garbage collection
1664 @item --print-gc-sections
1665 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1666 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1667 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1668 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1669 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1670 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1671 line.
1672
1673 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1674 @cindex garbage collection
1675 @item --gc-keep-exported
1676 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1677 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1678 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1679 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1680 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1681 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1682 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1683 ELF format targets.
1684
1685 @kindex --print-output-format
1686 @cindex output format
1687 @item --print-output-format
1688 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1689 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1690 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1691
1692 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1693 @cindex memory usage
1694 @item --print-memory-usage
1695 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1696 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1697 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1698 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1699 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1700
1701 @smallexample
1702 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1703 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1704 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1705 @end smallexample
1706
1707 @cindex help
1708 @cindex usage
1709 @kindex --help
1710 @item --help
1711 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1712
1713 @kindex --target-help
1714 @item --target-help
1715 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1716
1717 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1718 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1719 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1720 @option{-M} option, above.
1721
1722 @cindex memory usage
1723 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1724 @item --no-keep-memory
1725 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1726 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1727 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1728 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1729 while linking a large executable.
1730
1731 @kindex --no-undefined
1732 @kindex -z defs
1733 @kindex -z undefs
1734 @item --no-undefined
1735 @itemx -z defs
1736 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1737 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1738 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1739 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1740 libraries being linked in.
1741
1742 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1743
1744 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1745 @kindex -z muldefs
1746 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1747 @itemx -z muldefs
1748 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1749 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1750 first definition will be used.
1751
1752 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1753 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1754 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1755 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1756 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1757 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1758 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1759 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1760 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1761
1762 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1763 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1764 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1765 a shared library.
1766
1767 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1768 libraries specified at link time are that:
1769
1770 @itemize @bullet
1771 @item
1772 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1773 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1774 resolvable at load time.
1775 @item
1776 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1777 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1778
1779 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1780 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1781 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1782 appropriate memset function.
1783 @end itemize
1784
1785 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1786 @item --no-undefined-version
1787 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1788 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1789 will be issued instead.
1790
1791 @kindex --default-symver
1792 @item --default-symver
1793 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1794 exported symbols.
1795
1796 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1797 @item --default-imported-symver
1798 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1799 imported symbols.
1800
1801 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1802 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1803 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1804 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1805 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1806 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1807 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1808 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1809 inappropriate.
1810
1811 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1812 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1813 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1814 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1815
1816 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1817 @item --no-whole-archive
1818 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1819 archive files.
1820
1821 @cindex output file after errors
1822 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1823 @item --noinhibit-exec
1824 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1825 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1826 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1827 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1828
1829 @kindex -nostdlib
1830 @item -nostdlib
1831 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1832 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1833 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1834
1835 @ifclear SingleFormat
1836 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1837 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1838 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1839 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1840 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1841 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1842 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1843 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1844 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1845 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1846 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1847 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1848 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1849 @end ifclear
1850
1851 @kindex --out-implib
1852 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1853 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1854 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1855 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1856 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1857 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1858 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1859 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1860
1861 @kindex -pie
1862 @kindex --pic-executable
1863 @item -pie
1864 @itemx --pic-executable
1865 @cindex position independent executables
1866 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1867 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1868 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1869 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1870 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1871 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1872
1873 @kindex -qmagic
1874 @item -qmagic
1875 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1876
1877 @kindex -Qy
1878 @item -Qy
1879 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1880
1881 @kindex --relax
1882 @cindex synthesizing linker
1883 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1884 @cindex --no-relax
1885 @item --relax
1886 @itemx --no-relax
1887 An option with machine dependent effects.
1888 @ifset GENERIC
1889 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1890 @end ifset
1891 @ifset H8300
1892 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1893 @end ifset
1894 @ifset XTENSA
1895 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1896 @end ifset
1897 @ifset M68HC11
1898 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1899 @end ifset
1900 @ifset NIOSII
1901 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1902 @end ifset
1903 @ifset POWERPC
1904 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1905 @end ifset
1906
1907 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1908 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1909 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1910 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1911 instructions, and combining constant values.
1912
1913 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1914 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1915 @ifset GENERIC
1916 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1917 family of processors.
1918 @end ifset
1919
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1922 but ignored.
1923 @end ifset
1924
1925 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1926 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1927
1928 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1929 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1930 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1931 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1932 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1933 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1934 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1935 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1936 @ifset GENERIC
1937 (such as VxWorks)
1938 @end ifset
1939 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1940 run-time memory.
1941
1942 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1943 or symbols needed for relocations.
1944
1945 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1946 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1947
1948 @ifset GENERIC
1949 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1950 @cindex runtime library search path
1951 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1952 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1953 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1954 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1955 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1956
1957 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
1958 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1959 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
1960 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
1961 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1962
1963 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
1964 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
1965 is defined.
1966
1967 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1968 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1969 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1973 file systems.
1974
1975 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1976 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1977 the @option{-rpath} option.
1978 @end ifset
1979
1980 @ifset GENERIC
1981 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1982 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1984 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986 of the input files.
1987
1988 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1991 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1992 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1993 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1994 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995 appearing multiple times.
1996
1997 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2001 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005 supported.
2006
2007 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010 runtime linker would do.
2011
2012 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2013 libraries:
2014 @enumerate
2015 @item
2016 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2017 @item
2018 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2019 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2020 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2021 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2022 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2023 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2024 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2025 @item
2026 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2027 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2028 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2029 @item
2030 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2031 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2032 @item
2033 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2034 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2035 @item
2036 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2037 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2038 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2039 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2040 @item
2041 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2042 @item
2043 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2044 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2045 @end enumerate
2046
2047 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2048 warning and continue with the link.
2049 @end ifset
2050
2051 @kindex -shared
2052 @kindex -Bshareable
2053 @item -shared
2054 @itemx -Bshareable
2055 @cindex shared libraries
2056 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2057 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2058 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2059 undefined symbols in the link.
2060
2061 @kindex --sort-common
2062 @item --sort-common
2063 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2064 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2065 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2066 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2067 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2068 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2069 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2070 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2071
2072 @kindex --sort-section=name
2073 @item --sort-section=name
2074 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2075 patterns in the linker script.
2076
2077 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2078 @item --sort-section=alignment
2079 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2080 patterns in the linker script.
2081
2082 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2083 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2084 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2085 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2086 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2087
2088 @kindex --split-by-file
2089 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2090 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2091 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2092 size of 1 if not given.
2093
2094 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2095 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2096 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2097 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2098 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2099 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2100 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2101 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2102 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2103 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2104 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2105 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2106
2107 @kindex --stats
2108 @item --stats
2109 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2110 as execution time and memory usage.
2111
2112 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2113 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2115 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2116 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2117
2118 @kindex --task-link
2119 @item --task-link
2120 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2121 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2122
2123 @kindex --traditional-format
2124 @cindex traditional format
2125 @item --traditional-format
2126 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2127 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2128 use the traditional format instead.
2129
2130 @cindex dbx
2131 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2132 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2133 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2134 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2135 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2136 combine duplicate entries.
2137
2138 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2139 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2140 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2141 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2142 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2143 line.
2144 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2145 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2146 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2147 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2148 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2149
2150 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2151 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2152 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2153 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2154 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2155 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2156 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2157 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2158 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2159
2160 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2161 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2162 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2163 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2164 byte of the text segment.
2165
2166 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2167 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2169 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2170 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2171 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2172
2173 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2174 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2176 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2177 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2178
2179 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2180 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2181 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2182 values for @samp{method}:
2183
2184 @table @samp
2185 @item ignore-all
2186 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2187
2188 @item report-all
2189 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2190
2191 @item ignore-in-object-files
2192 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2193 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2194
2195 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2196 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2197 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2198 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2199 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2200 command line.
2201 @end table
2202
2203 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2204 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2205
2206 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2207 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2208 can change this to a warning.
2209
2210 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2211 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2212 @item --dll-verbose
2213 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2214 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2215 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2216 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2217 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2218
2219 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2220 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2221 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2222 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2223 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2224 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2225 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2226 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2227 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2228 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2229 @xref{WIN32}.
2230
2231 @kindex --warn-common
2232 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2233 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2234 @item --warn-common
2235 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2236 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2237 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2238 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2239 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2240 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2241
2242 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2243
2244 @table @samp
2245 @item int i = 1;
2246 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2247 file.
2248
2249 @item extern int i;
2250 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2251 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2252 variable somewhere.
2253
2254 @item int i;
2255 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2256 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2257 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2258 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2259 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2260 a definition of the same variable.
2261 @end table
2262
2263 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2264 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2265 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2266 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2267 a common symbol.
2268
2269 @enumerate
2270 @item
2271 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2272 definition for the symbol.
2273 @smallexample
2274 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2275 overridden by definition
2276 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2277 @end smallexample
2278
2279 @item
2280 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2281 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2282 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2283 @smallexample
2284 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2285 overriding common
2286 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2287 @end smallexample
2288
2289 @item
2290 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2291 @smallexample
2292 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2293 of `@var{symbol}'
2294 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 @item
2298 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2299 @smallexample
2300 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2301 overridden by larger common
2302 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2303 @end smallexample
2304
2305 @item
2306 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2307 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2308 encountered in a different order.
2309 @smallexample
2310 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2311 overriding smaller common
2312 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2313 @end smallexample
2314 @end enumerate
2315
2316 @kindex --warn-constructors
2317 @item --warn-constructors
2318 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2319 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2320 detect the use of global constructors.
2321
2322 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2323 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2324 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2325 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2326 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2327 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2328 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2329 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2330 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2331 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2332 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2333 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2334 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2335
2336 @kindex --warn-once
2337 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2338 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2339 @item --warn-once
2340 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2341 which refers to it.
2342
2343 @kindex --warn-section-align
2344 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2345 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2346 @item --warn-section-align
2347 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2348 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2349 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2350 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2351 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2352
2353 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2354 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2355 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2356
2357 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2358 @item --warn-alternate-em
2359 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2360
2361 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2362 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2364 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2365 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2366
2367 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2368 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2369 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2370 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2371
2372 @kindex --whole-archive
2373 @cindex including an entire archive
2374 @item --whole-archive
2375 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2376 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2377 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2378 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2379 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2380 library. This option may be used more than once.
2381
2382 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2383 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2384 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2385 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2386 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2387
2388 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2389 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2390 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2391 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2392 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2393 @var{symbol}.
2394
2395 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2396 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2397 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2398 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2399
2400 Here is a trivial example:
2401
2402 @smallexample
2403 void *
2404 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2405 @{
2406 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2407 return __real_malloc (c);
2408 @}
2409 @end smallexample
2410
2411 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2412 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2413 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2414 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2415
2416 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2417 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2418 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2419 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2420 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2421
2422 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2423 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2424 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2425 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2426
2427 @smallexample
2428 int
2429 f (void)
2430 @{
2431 return 123;
2432 @}
2433
2434 int
2435 g (void)
2436 @{
2437 return f();
2438 @}
2439 @end smallexample
2440
2441 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2442 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2443 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2444 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2445 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2446 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2447 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2448
2449 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2450 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2451 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2452 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2453 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2454
2455 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2456 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2457 @item --enable-new-dtags
2458 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2459 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2460 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2461 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2462 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2463 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2464 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2465 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2466
2467 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2468 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2469 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2470 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2471 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2472 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2473 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2474
2475 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2476 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2477 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2478 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2479 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2480 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2481 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2482 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2483
2484 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2485 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2486 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2487 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2488 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2489 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2490 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2491 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2492 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2493 compressed using zlib.
2494
2495 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2496 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2497 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2498 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2499 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2500 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2501
2502 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2503 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2504
2505 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2506 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2507 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2508 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2509
2510 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2511 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2512 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2513 @option{--help} option.
2514
2515 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2516 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2517 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2518 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2519 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2520 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2521
2522 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2523 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2524 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2525 has been used.
2526
2527 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2528 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2529
2530 @kindex --build-id
2531 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2532 @item --build-id
2533 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2534 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2535 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2536 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2537 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2538 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2539 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2540 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2541 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2542 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2543 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2544
2545 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2546 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2547 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2548 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2549 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2550 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2551
2552 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2553 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2554 @end table
2555
2556 @c man end
2557
2558 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2559
2560 @c man begin OPTIONS
2561
2562 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2563 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2564 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2565 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2566 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2567 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2568 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2569 object file).
2570
2571 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2572 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2573 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2574 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2575
2576 @table @gcctabopt
2577
2578 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2579 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2580 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2581 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 @kindex --base-file
2585 @item --base-file @var{file}
2586 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2587 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2588 @file{dlltool}.
2589 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2590
2591 @kindex --dll
2592 @item --dll
2593 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2594 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2595 file.
2596 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2597
2598 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2599 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2600 @item --enable-long-section-names
2601 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2602 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2603 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2604 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2605 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2606 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2607 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2608 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2609 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2610 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2611 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2612 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2613 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2614 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2615 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2616 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2617 image and not stripping symbols.
2618 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2619
2620 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2621 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2622 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2623 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2624 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2625 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2626 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2627 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2628 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2629 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2630 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2631 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2632 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2633 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2634 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2635 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2636 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2637 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639 @kindex --leading-underscore
2640 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2641 @item --leading-underscore
2642 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2643 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2644 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2645 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2646
2647 @cindex DLLs, creating
2648 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2649 @item --export-all-symbols
2650 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2651 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2652 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2653 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2654 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2655 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2656 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2657 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2658 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2659 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2660 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2661 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2662 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2663 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2664 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2665 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2666 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2667 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2668 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2669 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2670 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2671 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2675 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2676 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2677 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2681 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2682 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @kindex --file-alignment
2686 @item --file-alignment
2687 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2688 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2689 512.
2690 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2691
2692 @cindex heap size
2693 @kindex --heap
2694 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2695 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2696 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2697 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2698 committed.
2699 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2700
2701 @cindex image base
2702 @kindex --image-base
2703 @item --image-base @var{value}
2704 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2705 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2706 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2707 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2708 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2709 for dlls.
2710 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2711
2712 @kindex --kill-at
2713 @item --kill-at
2714 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2715 symbols before they are exported.
2716 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2717
2718 @kindex --large-address-aware
2719 @item --large-address-aware
2720 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2721 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2722 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2723 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2724 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2725 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2726
2727 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2728 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2729 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2730 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2731 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2732 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2733 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2734
2735 @kindex --major-image-version
2736 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2737 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2738 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
2740 @kindex --major-os-version
2741 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2742 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2743 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
2745 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2746 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2747 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2748 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2749
2750 @kindex --minor-image-version
2751 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2752 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2753 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2754
2755 @kindex --minor-os-version
2756 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2757 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2758 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2759
2760 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2761 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2762 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2763 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2764
2765 @cindex DEF files, creating
2766 @cindex DLLs, creating
2767 @kindex --output-def
2768 @item --output-def @var{file}
2769 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2770 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2771 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2772 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2773 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2774 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2775
2776 @cindex DLLs, creating
2777 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2778 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2779 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2780 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2781 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2782 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2783 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2784 execution are avoided.
2785 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2786
2787 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2788 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2789 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2790 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2791 default.
2792 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2793
2794 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2795 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2796 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2797 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2798 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2799 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2800 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2801 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2802 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2803 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2804
2805 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2806 @item --enable-auto-import
2807 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2808 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2809 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2810 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2811
2812 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2813 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2814
2815 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2816 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2817 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2818
2819 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2820 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2821 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2822 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2823 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2824
2825 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2826 see this message:
2827
2828 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2829 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2830
2831 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2832 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2833 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2834 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2835 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2836 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2837 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2838 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2839 the warning, and exit.
2840
2841 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2842 data type of the exported variable:
2843
2844 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2845 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2846 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2847
2848 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2849 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2850 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2851 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2852
2853 @example
2854 extern type extern_array[];
2855 extern_array[1] -->
2856 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2857 @end example
2858
2859 or
2860
2861 @example
2862 extern type extern_array[];
2863 extern_array[1] -->
2864 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2865 @end example
2866
2867 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2868 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2869
2870 @example
2871 extern struct s extern_struct;
2872 extern_struct.field -->
2873 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2874 @end example
2875
2876 or
2877
2878 @example
2879 extern long long extern_ll;
2880 extern_ll -->
2881 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2882 @end example
2883
2884 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2885 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2886 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2887 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2888 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2889 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2890 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2891 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2892
2893 Original:
2894 @example
2895 --foo.h
2896 extern int arr[];
2897 --foo.c
2898 #include "foo.h"
2899 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2900 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2901 @}
2902 @end example
2903
2904 Solution 1:
2905 @example
2906 --foo.h
2907 extern int arr[];
2908 --foo.c
2909 #include "foo.h"
2910 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2912 volatile int *parr = arr;
2913 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2914 @}
2915 @end example
2916
2917 Solution 2:
2918 @example
2919 --foo.h
2920 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2921 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2922 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2923 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2924 #else
2925 #define FOO_IMPORT
2926 #endif
2927 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2928 --foo.c
2929 #include "foo.h"
2930 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2931 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2932 @}
2933 @end example
2934
2935 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2936 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2937 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2938 functions).
2939
2940 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2941 @item --disable-auto-import
2942 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2943 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2944 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2945
2946 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2947 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2949 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2950 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2951 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2952 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2953
2954 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2955 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2956 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2957 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2958
2959 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2960 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2962 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2963
2964 @kindex --section-alignment
2965 @item --section-alignment
2966 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2967 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2968 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2969
2970 @cindex stack size
2971 @kindex --stack
2972 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2973 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2974 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2975 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2976 committed.
2977 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2978
2979 @kindex --subsystem
2980 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2981 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2982 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2983 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2984 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2985 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2986 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2987 @var{which}.
2988 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2989
2990 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2991 of the PE file header:
2992 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2993
2994 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2995 @item --high-entropy-va
2996 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2997 (ASLR).
2998
2999 @kindex --dynamicbase
3000 @item --dynamicbase
3001 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3002 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3003 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3004
3005 @kindex --forceinteg
3006 @item --forceinteg
3007 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3008
3009 @kindex --nxcompat
3010 @item --nxcompat
3011 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3012 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3013
3014 @kindex --no-isolation
3015 @item --no-isolation
3016 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3017
3018 @kindex --no-seh
3019 @item --no-seh
3020 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3021 this image.
3022
3023 @kindex --no-bind
3024 @item --no-bind
3025 Do not bind this image.
3026
3027 @kindex --wdmdriver
3028 @item --wdmdriver
3029 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3030
3031 @kindex --tsaware
3032 @item --tsaware
3033 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3034
3035 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3036 @item --insert-timestamp
3037 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3038 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3039 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3040 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3041 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3042 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3043 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3044 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3045 identically.
3046 @end table
3047
3048 @c man end
3049
3050 @ifset C6X
3051 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3052
3053 @c man begin OPTIONS
3054
3055 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3056 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3057 all executables use an index of 0.
3058
3059 @table @gcctabopt
3060
3061 @kindex --dsbt-size
3062 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3063 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3064 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3065 entries.
3066
3067 @kindex --dsbt-index
3068 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3069 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3070 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3071 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3072 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3073
3074 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3075 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3076 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3077
3078 @end table
3079
3080 @c man end
3081 @end ifset
3082
3083 @ifset CSKY
3084 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3085
3086 @c man begin OPTIONS
3087
3088 @table @gcctabopt
3089
3090 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3091 @item --branch-stub
3092 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3093 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3094 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3095 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3096 the compiler or assembler.
3097
3098 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3099 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3100 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3101 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3102 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3103 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3104 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3105 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3106 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3107
3108 @end table
3109
3110 @c man end
3111 @end ifset
3112
3113 @ifset M68HC11
3114 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3115
3116 @c man begin OPTIONS
3117
3118 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3119 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3120
3121 @table @gcctabopt
3122
3123 @kindex --no-trampoline
3124 @item --no-trampoline
3125 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3126 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3127 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3128
3129 @kindex --bank-window
3130 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3131 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3132 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3133 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3134 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3135
3136 @end table
3137
3138 @c man end
3139 @end ifset
3140
3141 @ifset M68K
3142 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3143
3144 @c man begin OPTIONS
3145
3146 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3147 when linking for 68K targets.
3148
3149 @table @gcctabopt
3150
3151 @kindex --got
3152 @item --got=@var{type}
3153 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3154 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3155 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3156 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3157
3158 @end table
3159
3160 @c man end
3161 @end ifset
3162
3163 @ifset MIPS
3164 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3165
3166 @c man begin OPTIONS
3167
3168 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3169 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3170 linking for MIPS targets.
3171
3172 @table @gcctabopt
3173
3174 @kindex --insn32
3175 @item --insn32
3176 @kindex --no-insn32
3177 @itemx --no-insn32
3178 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3179 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3180 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3181 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3182 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3183 possible.
3184
3185 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3186 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3187 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3188 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3189 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3190 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3191 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3192 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3193 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3194 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3195 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3196 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3197 an error.
3198
3199 @kindex --compact-branches
3200 @item --compact-branches
3201 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3202 @item --compact-branches
3203 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3204 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3205
3206 @end table
3207
3208 @c man end
3209 @end ifset
3210
3211 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3212 @node Environment
3213 @section Environment Variables
3214
3215 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3216
3217 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3218 @ifclear SingleFormat
3219 @code{GNUTARGET},
3220 @end ifclear
3221 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3222
3223 @ifclear SingleFormat
3224 @kindex GNUTARGET
3225 @cindex default input format
3226 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3227 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3228 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3229 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3230 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3231 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3232 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3233 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3234 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3235 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3236 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3237 @end ifclear
3238
3239 @kindex LDEMULATION
3240 @cindex default emulation
3241 @cindex emulation, default
3242 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3243 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3244 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3245 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3246 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3247 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3248 linker was configured.
3249
3250 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3251 @cindex demangling, default
3252 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3253 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3254 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3255 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3256 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3257 options.
3258
3259 @c man end
3260 @end ifset
3261
3262 @node Scripts
3263 @chapter Linker Scripts
3264
3265 @cindex scripts
3266 @cindex linker scripts
3267 @cindex command files
3268 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3269 written in the linker command language.
3270
3271 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3272 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3273 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3274 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3275 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3276 described below.
3277
3278 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3279 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3280 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3281 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3282 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3283
3284 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3285 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3286 default linker script.
3287
3288 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3289 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3290 Linker Scripts}.
3291
3292 @menu
3293 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3294 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3295 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3296 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3297 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3298 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3299 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3300 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3301 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3302 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3303 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3304 @end menu
3305
3306 @node Basic Script Concepts
3307 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3308 @cindex linker script concepts
3309 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3310 describe the linker script language.
3311
3312 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3313 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3314 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3315 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3316 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3317 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3318 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3319 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3320
3321 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3322 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3323 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3324 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3325 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3326 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3327 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3328 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3329 of debugging information.
3330
3331 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3332 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3333 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3334 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3335 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3336 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3337 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3338 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3339 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3340 RAM address would be the VMA.
3341
3342 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3343 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3344
3345 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3346 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3347 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3348 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3349 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3350 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3351 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3352
3353 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3354 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3355 option.
3356
3357 @node Script Format
3358 @section Linker Script Format
3359 @cindex linker script format
3360 Linker scripts are text files.
3361
3362 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3363 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3364 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3365 generally ignored.
3366
3367 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3368 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3369 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3370 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3371 file name.
3372
3373 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3374 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3375 to whitespace.
3376
3377 @node Simple Example
3378 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3379 @cindex linker script example
3380 @cindex example of linker script
3381 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3382
3383 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3384 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3385 memory layout of the output file.
3386
3387 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3388 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3389 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3390 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3391 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3392 your input files.
3393
3394 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3395 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3396 linker script which will do that:
3397 @smallexample
3398 SECTIONS
3399 @{
3400 . = 0x10000;
3401 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3402 . = 0x8000000;
3403 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3404 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3405 @}
3406 @end smallexample
3407
3408 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3409 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3410 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3411
3412 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3413 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3414 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3415 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3416 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3417 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3418 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3419
3420 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3421 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3422 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3423 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3424 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3425 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3426
3427 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3428 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3429 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3430
3431 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3432 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3433 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3434 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3435 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3436 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3437 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3438
3439 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3440 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3441 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3442 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3443 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3444 sections.
3445
3446 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3447
3448 @node Simple Commands
3449 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3450 @cindex linker script simple commands
3451 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3452
3453 @menu
3454 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3455 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3456 @ifclear SingleFormat
3457 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3458 @end ifclear
3459
3460 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3461 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3462 @end menu
3463
3464 @node Entry Point
3465 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3466 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3467 @cindex start of execution
3468 @cindex first instruction
3469 @cindex entry point
3470 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3471 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3472 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3473 @smallexample
3474 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3475 @end smallexample
3476
3477 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3478 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3479 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3480 @itemize @bullet
3481 @item
3482 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3483 @item
3484 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3485 @item
3486 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3487 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3488 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3489 @item
3490 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3491 @item
3492 The address @code{0}.
3493 @end itemize
3494
3495 @node File Commands
3496 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3497 @cindex linker script file commands
3498 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3499
3500 @table @code
3501 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3502 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3503 @cindex including a linker script
3504 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3505 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3506 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3507 10 levels deep.
3508
3509 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3510 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3511
3512 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3513 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3514 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3515 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3516 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3517 @cindex linker script input object files
3518 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3519 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3520
3521 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3522 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3523 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3524
3525 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3526 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3527
3528 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3529 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3530 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3531 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3532 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3533 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3534 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3535 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3536 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3537 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3538
3539 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3540 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3541 @samp{-l}.
3542
3543 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3544 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3545 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3546
3547 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3548 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3549 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3550 @cindex grouping input files
3551 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3552 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3553 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3554 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3555
3556 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3557 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3558 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3559 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3560 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3561 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3562 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3563 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3564 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3565 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3566 setting afterwards.
3567
3568 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3569 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3570 @cindex output file name in linker script
3571 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3572 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3573 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3574 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3575 precedence.
3576
3577 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3578 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3579
3580 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3581 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3582 @cindex library search path in linker script
3583 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3584 @cindex search path in linker script
3585 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3586 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3587 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3588 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3589 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3590 the command-line option are searched first.
3591
3592 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3593 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3594 @cindex first input file
3595 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3596 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3597 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3598 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3599 first file.
3600 @end table
3601
3602 @ifclear SingleFormat
3603 @node Format Commands
3604 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3605 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3606
3607 @table @code
3608 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3609 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3610 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3611 @cindex output file format in linker script
3612 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3613 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3614 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3615 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3616 line option takes precedence.
3617
3618 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3619 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3620 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3621 desired endianness.
3622
3623 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3624 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3625 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3626 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3627
3628 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3629 command:
3630 @smallexample
3631 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3632 @end smallexample
3633 This says that the default format for the output file is
3634 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3635 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3636 format.
3637
3638 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3639 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3640 @cindex input file format in linker script
3641 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3642 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3643 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3644 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3645 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3646 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3647 @end table
3648 @end ifclear
3649
3650 @node REGION_ALIAS
3651 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3652 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3653 @cindex region alias
3654 @cindex region names
3655
3656 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3657 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3658
3659 @smallexample
3660 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3661 @end smallexample
3662
3663 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3664 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3665 to memory regions. An example follows.
3666
3667 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3668 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3669 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3670 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3671 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3672 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3673 sections:
3674
3675 @itemize @bullet
3676 @item
3677 @code{.text} program code;
3678 @item
3679 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3680 @item
3681 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3682 @item
3683 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3684 @end itemize
3685
3686 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3687 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3688 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3689 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3690 @code{C}:
3691 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3692 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3693 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3694 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3695 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3696 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3697 @end multitable
3698 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3699 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3700 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3701 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3702
3703 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3704 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3705 memory layout:
3706 @smallexample
3707 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3708
3709 SECTIONS
3710 @{
3711 .text :
3712 @{
3713 *(.text)
3714 @} > REGION_TEXT
3715 .rodata :
3716 @{
3717 *(.rodata)
3718 rodata_end = .;
3719 @} > REGION_RODATA
3720 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3721 @{
3722 data_start = .;
3723 *(.data)
3724 @} > REGION_DATA
3725 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3726 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3727 .bss :
3728 @{
3729 *(.bss)
3730 @} > REGION_BSS
3731 @}
3732 @end smallexample
3733
3734 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3735 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3736 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3737 @table @code
3738 @item A
3739 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3740 @smallexample
3741 MEMORY
3742 @{
3743 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3744 @}
3745
3746 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3747 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3748 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3749 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3750 @end smallexample
3751 @item B
3752 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3753 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3754 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3755 @smallexample
3756 MEMORY
3757 @{
3758 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3759 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3760 @}
3761
3762 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3763 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3764 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3765 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3766 @end smallexample
3767 @item C
3768 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3769 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3770 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3771 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3772 @smallexample
3773 MEMORY
3774 @{
3775 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3776 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3777 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3778 @}
3779
3780 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3781 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3782 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3783 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3784 @end smallexample
3785 @end table
3786
3787 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3788 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3789 necessary:
3790 @smallexample
3791 #include <string.h>
3792
3793 extern char data_start [];
3794 extern char data_size [];
3795 extern char data_load_start [];
3796
3797 void copy_data(void)
3798 @{
3799 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3800 @{
3801 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3802 @}
3803 @}
3804 @end smallexample
3805
3806 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3807 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3808 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3809
3810 @table @code
3811 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3812 @kindex ASSERT
3813 @cindex assertion in linker script
3814 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3815 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3816
3817 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3818 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3819 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3820 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3821 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3822
3823 @smallexample
3824 .stack :
3825 @{
3826 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3827 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3828 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3829 @}
3830 @end smallexample
3831
3832 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3833 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3834 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3835
3836 @smallexample
3837 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3838 .stack :
3839 @{
3840 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3841 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3842 @}
3843 @end smallexample
3844
3845 will work.
3846
3847 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3848 @kindex EXTERN
3849 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3850 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3851 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3852 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3853 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3854 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3855
3856 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3857 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3858 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3859 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3860 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3861 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3862
3863 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3864 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3865 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3866 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3867 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3868 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3869
3870 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3871 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3872 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3873 @cindex section groups
3874 @cindex COMDAT
3875 This command has the same effect as the
3876 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3877 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3878 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3879 specified (@samp{-r}).
3880
3881 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3882 @kindex INSERT
3883 @cindex insert user script into default script
3884 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3885 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3886 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3887 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3888 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3889 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3890 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3891 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3892 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3893 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3894 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3895 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3896 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3897
3898 @smallexample
3899 SECTIONS
3900 @{
3901 OVERLAY :
3902 @{
3903 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3904 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3905 @}
3906 @}
3907 INSERT AFTER .text;
3908 @end smallexample
3909
3910 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3911 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3912 @cindex cross references
3913 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3914 references among certain output sections.
3915
3916 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3917 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3918 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3919 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3920 a function defined in the other section.
3921
3922 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3923 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3924 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3925 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3926 names.
3927
3928 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3929 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3930 @cindex cross references
3931 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3932 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3933
3934 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3935 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3936 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3937 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3938 must never call back.
3939
3940 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3941 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3942 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3943 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3944 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3945 names, not input section names.
3946
3947 @ifclear SingleFormat
3948 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3949 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3950 @cindex machine architecture
3951 @cindex architecture
3952 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3953 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3954 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3955 the @samp{-f} option.
3956 @end ifclear
3957
3958 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3959 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3960 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3961 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3962 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3963 @xref{Expression Section}.
3964 @end table
3965
3966 @node Assignments
3967 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3968 @cindex assignment in scripts
3969 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3970 @cindex variables, defining
3971 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3972 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3973
3974 @menu
3975 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3976 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3977 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3978 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3979 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3980 @end menu
3981
3982 @node Simple Assignments
3983 @subsection Simple Assignments
3984
3985 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3986
3987 @table @code
3988 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3989 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3990 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3991 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3992 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3993 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3994 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3995 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3996 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3997 @end table
3998
3999 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4000 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4001 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4002
4003 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4004 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4005
4006 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4007
4008 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4009
4010 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4011 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4012 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4013
4014 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4015 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4016
4017 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4018 assignments may be used:
4019
4020 @smallexample
4021 floating_point = 0;
4022 SECTIONS
4023 @{
4024 .text :
4025 @{
4026 *(.text)
4027 _etext = .;
4028 @}
4029 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4030 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4031 @}
4032 @end smallexample
4033 @noindent
4034 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4035 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4036 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4037 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4038 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4039
4040 @node HIDDEN
4041 @subsection HIDDEN
4042 @cindex HIDDEN
4043 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4044 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4045
4046 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4047 @code{HIDDEN}:
4048
4049 @smallexample
4050 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4051 SECTIONS
4052 @{
4053 .text :
4054 @{
4055 *(.text)
4056 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4057 @}
4058 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4059 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4060 @}
4061 @end smallexample
4062 @noindent
4063 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4064
4065 @node PROVIDE
4066 @subsection PROVIDE
4067 @cindex PROVIDE
4068 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4069 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4070 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4071 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4072 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4073 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4074 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4075 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4076
4077 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4078 @smallexample
4079 SECTIONS
4080 @{
4081 .text :
4082 @{
4083 *(.text)
4084 _etext = .;
4085 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4086 @}
4087 @}
4088 @end smallexample
4089
4090 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4091 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4092 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4093 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4094 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4095 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4096
4097 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4098 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4099 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4100 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4101 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4102
4103 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4104 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4105 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4106 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4107 hidden and won't be exported.
4108
4109 @node Source Code Reference
4110 @subsection Source Code Reference
4111
4112 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4113 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4114 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4115 symbol that does not have a value.
4116
4117 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4118 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4119 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4120 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4121 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4122 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4123 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4124 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4125
4126 @smallexample
4127 extern int foo;
4128 @end smallexample
4129
4130 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4131
4132 @smallexample
4133 _foo = 1000;
4134 @end smallexample
4135
4136 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4137 transformation has taken place.
4138
4139 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4140 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4141 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4142 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4143 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4144 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4145 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4146
4147 @smallexample
4148 int foo = 1000;
4149 @end smallexample
4150
4151 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4152 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4153 number 1000 is initially stored.
4154
4155 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4156 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4157 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4158 So:
4159
4160 @smallexample
4161 foo = 1;
4162 @end smallexample
4163
4164 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4165 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4166 address. Whereas:
4167
4168 @smallexample
4169 int * a = & foo;
4170 @end smallexample
4171
4172 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4173 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4174 the variable @samp{a}.
4175
4176 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4177 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4178 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4179
4180 @smallexample
4181 foo = 1000;
4182 @end smallexample
4183
4184 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4185 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4186 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4187 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4188 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4189
4190 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4191 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4192 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4193 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4194 linker script contains these declarations:
4195
4196 @smallexample
4197 @group
4198 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4199 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4200 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4201 @end group
4202 @end smallexample
4203
4204 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4205
4206 @smallexample
4207 @group
4208 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4209
4210 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4211 @end group
4212 @end smallexample
4213
4214 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4215 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4216 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4217
4218 @smallexample
4219 @group
4220 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4221
4222 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4223 @end group
4224 @end smallexample
4225
4226 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4227 operators.
4228
4229 @node SECTIONS
4230 @section SECTIONS Command
4231 @kindex SECTIONS
4232 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4233 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4234
4235 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4236 @smallexample
4237 SECTIONS
4238 @{
4239 @var{sections-command}
4240 @var{sections-command}
4241 @dots{}
4242 @}
4243 @end smallexample
4244
4245 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4246
4247 @itemize @bullet
4248 @item
4249 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4250 @item
4251 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4252 @item
4253 an output section description
4254 @item
4255 an overlay description
4256 @end itemize
4257
4258 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4259 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4260 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4261 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4262 the layout of the output file.
4263
4264 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4265 below.
4266
4267 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4268 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4269 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4270 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4271 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4272 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4273
4274 @menu
4275 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4276 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4277 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4278 * Input Section:: Input section description
4279 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4280 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4281 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4282 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4283 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4284 @end menu
4285
4286 @node Output Section Description
4287 @subsection Output Section Description
4288 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4289 @smallexample
4290 @group
4291 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4292 [AT(@var{lma})]
4293 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4294 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4295 [@var{constraint}]
4296 @{
4297 @var{output-section-command}
4298 @var{output-section-command}
4299 @dots{}
4300 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4301 @end group
4302 @end smallexample
4303
4304 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4305
4306 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4307 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4308 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4309 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4310 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4311
4312 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4313
4314 @itemize @bullet
4315 @item
4316 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4317 @item
4318 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4319 @item
4320 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4321 @item
4322 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4323 @end itemize
4324
4325 @node Output Section Name
4326 @subsection Output Section Name
4327 @cindex name, section
4328 @cindex section name
4329 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4330 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4331 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4332 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4333 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4334 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4335 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4336 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4337 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4338 commas must be quoted.
4339
4340 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4341 Discarding}.
4342
4343 @node Output Section Address
4344 @subsection Output Section Address
4345 @cindex address, section
4346 @cindex section address
4347 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4348 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4349 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4350
4351 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4352 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4353 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4354 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4355 contained within the output section.
4356
4357 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4358
4359 @itemize @bullet
4360 @item
4361 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4362 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4363 in that region.
4364
4365 @item
4366 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4367 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4368 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4369 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4370
4371 @item
4372 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4373 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4374 counter.
4375 @end itemize
4376
4377 @noindent
4378 For example:
4379
4380 @smallexample
4381 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4382 @end smallexample
4383
4384 @noindent
4385 and
4386
4387 @smallexample
4388 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4389 @end smallexample
4390
4391 @noindent
4392 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4393 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4394 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4395 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4396 input sections.
4397
4398 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4399 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4400 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4401 do something like this:
4402 @smallexample
4403 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4404 @end smallexample
4405 @noindent
4406 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4407 aligned upward to the specified value.
4408
4409 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4410 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4411 sections are ignored).
4412
4413 @node Input Section
4414 @subsection Input Section Description
4415 @cindex input sections
4416 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4417 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4418
4419 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4420 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4421 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4422 map the input files into your memory layout.
4423
4424 @menu
4425 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4426 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4427 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4428 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4429 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4430 @end menu
4431
4432 @node Input Section Basics
4433 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4434 @cindex input section basics
4435 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4436 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4437
4438 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4439 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4440
4441 The most common input section description is to include all input
4442 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4443 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4444 @smallexample
4445 *(.text)
4446 @end smallexample
4447 @noindent
4448 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4449 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4450 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4451 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4452 example:
4453 @smallexample
4454 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4455 @end smallexample
4456 @noindent
4457 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4458 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4459 placed inside the section list, for example:
4460 @smallexample
4461 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4462 @end smallexample
4463 @noindent
4464 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4465 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4466 more than one section, as described below.
4467
4468 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4469 @smallexample
4470 *(.text .rdata)
4471 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4472 @end smallexample
4473 @noindent
4474 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4475 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4476 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4477 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4478 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4479 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4480
4481 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4482 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4483 immediately following section, for example:
4484 @smallexample
4485 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4486 @end smallexample
4487 @noindent
4488 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4489 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4490 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4491 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4492 could be modified to:
4493 @smallexample
4494 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4495 @end smallexample
4496 @noindent
4497 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4498 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4499 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4500 @smallexample
4501 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4502 @end smallexample
4503
4504 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4505 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4506 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4507 @smallexample
4508 data.o(.data)
4509 @end smallexample
4510
4511 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4512 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4513
4514 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4515
4516 @smallexample
4517 @group
4518 SECTIONS @{
4519 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4520 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4521 @}
4522 @end group
4523 @end smallexample
4524
4525 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4526 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4527 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4528 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4529 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4530
4531 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4532 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4533 with no whitespace around the colon.
4534
4535 @table @samp
4536 @item archive:file
4537 matches file within archive
4538 @item archive:
4539 matches the whole archive
4540 @item :file
4541 matches file but not one in an archive
4542 @end table
4543
4544 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4545 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4546 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4547 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4548 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4549 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4550 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4551 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4552 command.
4553
4554 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4555 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4556 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4557 @smallexample
4558 data.o
4559 @end smallexample
4560
4561 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4562 and does not contain any wild card
4563 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4564 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4565 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4566 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4567 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4568 the archive search path.
4569
4570 @node Input Section Wildcards
4571 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4572 @cindex input section wildcards
4573 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4574 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4575 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4576 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4577 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4578
4579 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4580 pattern for the file name.
4581
4582 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4583
4584 @table @samp
4585 @item *
4586 matches any number of characters
4587 @item ?
4588 matches any single character
4589 @item [@var{chars}]
4590 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4591 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4592 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4593 @item \
4594 quotes the following character
4595 @end table
4596
4597 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4598 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4599 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4600 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4601 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4602 a @samp{/} character.
4603
4604 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4605 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4606 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4607
4608 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4609 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4610 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4611 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4612 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4613 @smallexample
4614 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4615 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4616 @end smallexample
4617
4618 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4619 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4620 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4621 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4622 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4623 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4624 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4625
4626 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4627 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4628 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4629 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4630 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4631 needed.
4632
4633 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4634 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4635 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4636 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4637 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4638 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4639 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4640 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4641
4642 @cindex SORT
4643 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4644
4645 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4646 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4647
4648 @enumerate
4649 @item
4650 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4651 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4652 sections have the same name.
4653 @item
4654 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4655 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4656 sections have the same alignment.
4657 @item
4658 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4659 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4660 @item
4661 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4662 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4663 @item
4664 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4665 @end enumerate
4666
4667 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4668 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4669 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4670
4671 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4672 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4673 treated as nested sorting command.
4674
4675 @enumerate
4676 @item
4677 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4678 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4679 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4680 @item
4681 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4682 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4683 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4684 @end enumerate
4685
4686 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4687 command-line option will be ignored.
4688
4689 @cindex SORT_NONE
4690 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4691 section sorting option.
4692
4693 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4694 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4695 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4696
4697 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4698 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4699 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4700 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4701 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4702 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4703 @smallexample
4704 @group
4705 SECTIONS @{
4706 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4707 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4708 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4709 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4710 @}
4711 @end group
4712 @end smallexample
4713
4714 @node Input Section Common
4715 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4716 @cindex common symbol placement
4717 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4718 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4719 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4720 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4721 named @samp{COMMON}.
4722
4723 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4724 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4725 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4726 input files are placed in another section.
4727
4728 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4729 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4730 @smallexample
4731 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4732 @end smallexample
4733
4734 @cindex scommon section
4735 @cindex small common symbols
4736 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4737 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4738 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4739 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4740 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4741 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4742 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4743 locations.
4744
4745 @cindex [COMMON]
4746 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4747 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4748 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4749
4750 @node Input Section Keep
4751 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4752 @cindex KEEP
4753 @cindex garbage collection
4754 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4755 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4756 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4757 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4758 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4759
4760 @node Input Section Example
4761 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4762 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4763 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4764 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4765 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4766 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4767 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4768 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4769 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4770 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4771
4772 @smallexample
4773 @group
4774 SECTIONS @{
4775 outputa 0x10000 :
4776 @{
4777 all.o
4778 foo.o (.input1)
4779 @}
4780 @end group
4781 @group
4782 outputb :
4783 @{
4784 foo.o (.input2)
4785 foo1.o (.input1)
4786 @}
4787 @end group
4788 @group
4789 outputc :
4790 @{
4791 *(.input1)
4792 *(.input2)
4793 @}
4794 @}
4795 @end group
4796 @end smallexample
4797
4798 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4799 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4800 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4801 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4802 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4803 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4804 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4805
4806 @node Output Section Data
4807 @subsection Output Section Data
4808 @cindex data
4809 @cindex section data
4810 @cindex output section data
4811 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4812 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4813 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4814 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4815 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4816 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4817 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4818 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4819 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4820 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4821 counter.
4822
4823 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4824 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4825 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4826 stored.
4827
4828 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4829 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4830 @smallexample
4831 BYTE(1)
4832 LONG(addr)
4833 @end smallexample
4834
4835 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4836 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4837 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4838 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4839 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4840
4841 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4842 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4843 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4844 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4845 endianness of the first input object file.
4846
4847 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4848 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4849 @smallexample
4850 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4851 @end smallexample
4852 whereas this will work:
4853 @smallexample
4854 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4855 @end smallexample
4856
4857 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4858 @cindex holes, filling
4859 @cindex unspecified memory
4860 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4861 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4862 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4863 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4864 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4865 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4866 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4867 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4868 different parts of an output section.
4869
4870 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4871 value @samp{0x90}:
4872 @smallexample
4873 FILL(0x90909090)
4874 @end smallexample
4875
4876 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4877 section attribute, but it only affects the
4878 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4879 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4880 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4881 expression.
4882
4883 @node Output Section Keywords
4884 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4885 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4886 commands.
4887
4888 @table @code
4889 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4890 @cindex input filename symbols
4891 @cindex filename symbols
4892 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4893 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4894 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4895 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4896 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4897
4898 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4899 normally used for any other object file format.
4900
4901 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4902 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4903 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4904 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4905 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4906 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4907 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4908 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4909 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4910 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4911 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4912 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4913 ignored for other object file formats.
4914
4915 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4916 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4917 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4918 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4919 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4920 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4921 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4922 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4923 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4924 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4925 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4926 @code{exit}.
4927
4928 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4929 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4930 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4931 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4932 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4933 runtime code expects to see.
4934
4935 @smallexample
4936 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4937 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4938 *(.ctors)
4939 LONG(0)
4940 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4941 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4942 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4943 *(.dtors)
4944 LONG(0)
4945 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4946 @end smallexample
4947
4948 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4949 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4950 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4951 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4952 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4953 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4954 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4955 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4956
4957 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4958 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4959 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4960 scripts.
4961
4962 @end table
4963
4964 @node Output Section Discarding
4965 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4966 @cindex discarding sections
4967 @cindex sections, discarding
4968 @cindex removing sections
4969 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4970 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4971 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4972 @smallexample
4973 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4974 @end smallexample
4975 @noindent
4976 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4977 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4978 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4979 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4980 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4981 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4982 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4983 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4984 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4985
4986 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4987 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4988 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4989 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4990 section is discarded.
4991
4992 @cindex /DISCARD/
4993 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4994 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4995 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4996
4997 @node Output Section Attributes
4998 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4999 @cindex output section attributes
5000 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5001 like this:
5002
5003 @smallexample
5004 @group
5005 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5006 [AT(@var{lma})]
5007 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5008 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5009 [@var{constraint}]
5010 @{
5011 @var{output-section-command}
5012 @var{output-section-command}
5013 @dots{}
5014 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5015 @end group
5016 @end smallexample
5017
5018 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5019 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5020 remaining section attributes.
5021
5022 @menu
5023 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5024 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5025 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5026 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5027 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5028 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5029 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5030 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5031 @end menu
5032
5033 @node Output Section Type
5034 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5035 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5036 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5037
5038 @table @code
5039 @item NOLOAD
5040 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5041 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5042 @item DSECT
5043 @itemx COPY
5044 @itemx INFO
5045 @itemx OVERLAY
5046 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5047 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5048 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5049 section when the program is run.
5050 @end table
5051
5052 @kindex NOLOAD
5053 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5054 @cindex loading, preventing
5055 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5056 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5057 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5058 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5059 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5060 @smallexample
5061 @group
5062 SECTIONS @{
5063 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5064 @dots{}
5065 @}
5066 @end group
5067 @end smallexample
5068
5069 @node Output Section LMA
5070 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5071 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5072 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5073 @cindex load address
5074 @cindex section load address
5075 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5076 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5077 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5078 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5079 address is optional.
5080
5081 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5082 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5083 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5084 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5085 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5086
5087 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5088 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5089 load address:
5090
5091 @itemize @bullet
5092 @item
5093 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5094 the LMA address as well.
5095
5096 @item
5097 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5098
5099 @item
5100 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5101 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5102 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5103 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5104 the last section in the located region.
5105
5106 @item
5107 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5108 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5109
5110 @item
5111 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5112 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5113 @end itemize
5114
5115 @cindex ROM initialized data
5116 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5117 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5118 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5119 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5120 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5121 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5122 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5123 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5124 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5125
5126 @smallexample
5127 @group
5128 SECTIONS
5129 @{
5130 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5131 .mdata 0x2000 :
5132 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5133 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5134 .bss 0x3000 :
5135 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5136 @}
5137 @end group
5138 @end smallexample
5139
5140 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5141 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5142 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5143 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5144 script.
5145
5146 @smallexample
5147 @group
5148 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5149 char *src = &_etext;
5150 char *dst = &_data;
5151
5152 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5153 while (dst < &_edata)
5154 *dst++ = *src++;
5155
5156 /* Zero bss. */
5157 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5158 *dst = 0;
5159 @end group
5160 @end smallexample
5161
5162 @node Forced Output Alignment
5163 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5164 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5165 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5166 @cindex output section alignment
5167 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5168 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5169 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5170
5171 @node Forced Input Alignment
5172 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5173 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5174 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5175 @cindex input section alignment
5176 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5177 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5178 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5179
5180 @node Output Section Constraint
5181 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5182 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5183 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5184 @cindex constraints on output sections
5185 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5186 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5187 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5188 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5189
5190 @node Output Section Region
5191 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5192 @kindex >@var{region}
5193 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5194 @cindex memory regions and sections
5195 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5196 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5197
5198 Here is a simple example:
5199 @smallexample
5200 @group
5201 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5202 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5203 @end group
5204 @end smallexample
5205
5206 @node Output Section Phdr
5207 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5208 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5209 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5210 @cindex program headers and sections
5211 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5212 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5213 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5214 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5215 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5216 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5217
5218 Here is a simple example:
5219 @smallexample
5220 @group
5221 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5222 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5223 @end group
5224 @end smallexample
5225
5226 @node Output Section Fill
5227 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5228 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5229 @cindex section fill pattern
5230 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5231 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5232 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5233 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5234 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5235 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5236 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5237 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5238 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5239 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5240 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5241 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5242 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5243
5244 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5245 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5246
5247 Here is a simple example:
5248 @smallexample
5249 @group
5250 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5251 @end group
5252 @end smallexample
5253
5254 @node Overlay Description
5255 @subsection Overlay Description
5256 @kindex OVERLAY
5257 @cindex overlays
5258 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5259 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5260 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5261 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5262 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5263 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5264 than another.
5265
5266 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5267 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5268 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5269 command is as follows:
5270 @smallexample
5271 @group
5272 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5273 @{
5274 @var{secname1}
5275 @{
5276 @var{output-section-command}
5277 @var{output-section-command}
5278 @dots{}
5279 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5280 @var{secname2}
5281 @{
5282 @var{output-section-command}
5283 @var{output-section-command}
5284 @dots{}
5285 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5286 @dots{}
5287 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5288 @end group
5289 @end smallexample
5290
5291 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5292 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5293 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5294 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5295 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5296 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5297
5298 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5299 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5300
5301 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5302 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5303 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5304 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5305 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5306 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5307
5308 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5309 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5310 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5311 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5312 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5313
5314 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5315 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5316 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5317 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5318 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5319 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5320 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5321
5322 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5323 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5324
5325 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5326 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5327 @smallexample
5328 @group
5329 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5330 @{
5331 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5332 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5333 @}
5334 @end group
5335 @end smallexample
5336 @noindent
5337 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5338 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5339 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5340 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5341 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5342 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5343
5344 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5345 like the following.
5346
5347 @smallexample
5348 @group
5349 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5350 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5351 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5352 @end group
5353 @end smallexample
5354
5355 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5356 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5357 example could have been written identically as follows.
5358
5359 @smallexample
5360 @group
5361 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5362 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5363 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5364 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5365 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5366 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5367 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5368 @end group
5369 @end smallexample
5370
5371 @node MEMORY
5372 @section MEMORY Command
5373 @kindex MEMORY
5374 @cindex memory regions
5375 @cindex regions of memory
5376 @cindex allocating memory
5377 @cindex discontinuous memory
5378 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5379 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5380
5381 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5382 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5383 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5384 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5385 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5386 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5387 around to fit into the available regions.
5388
5389 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5390 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5391 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5392 @code{MEMORY} is:
5393 @smallexample
5394 @group
5395 MEMORY
5396 @{
5397 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5398 @dots{}
5399 @}
5400 @end group
5401 @end smallexample
5402
5403 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5404 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5405 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5406 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5407 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5408 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5409 command.
5410
5411 @cindex memory region attributes
5412 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5413 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5414 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5415 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5416 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5417 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5418 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5419
5420 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5421 @table @samp
5422 @item R
5423 Read-only section
5424 @item W
5425 Read/write section
5426 @item X
5427 Executable section
5428 @item A
5429 Allocatable section
5430 @item I
5431 Initialized section
5432 @item L
5433 Same as @samp{I}
5434 @item !
5435 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5436 @end table
5437
5438 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5439 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5440 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5441 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5442 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5443 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5444 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5445 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5446
5447 @kindex ORIGIN =
5448 @kindex o =
5449 @kindex org =
5450 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5451 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5452 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5453 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5454 @code{ORG}).
5455
5456 @kindex LENGTH =
5457 @kindex len =
5458 @kindex l =
5459 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5460 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5461 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5462 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5463
5464 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5465 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5466 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5467 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5468 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5469 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5470 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5471 region.
5472
5473 @smallexample
5474 @group
5475 MEMORY
5476 @{
5477 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5478 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5479 @}
5480 @end group
5481 @end smallexample
5482
5483 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5484 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5485 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5486 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5487 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5488 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5489 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5490 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5491 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5492
5493 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5494 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5495 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5496
5497 @smallexample
5498 @group
5499 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5500 @end group
5501 @end smallexample
5502
5503 @node PHDRS
5504 @section PHDRS Command
5505 @kindex PHDRS
5506 @cindex program headers
5507 @cindex ELF program headers
5508 @cindex program segments
5509 @cindex segments, ELF
5510 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5511 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5512 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5513 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5514
5515 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5516 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5517 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5518 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5519 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5520
5521 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5522 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5523 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5524 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5525 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5526
5527 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5528 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5529 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5530
5531 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5532 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5533
5534 @smallexample
5535 @group
5536 PHDRS
5537 @{
5538 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5539 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5540 @}
5541 @end group
5542 @end smallexample
5543
5544 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5545 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5546 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5547 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5548 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5549 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5550
5551 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5552 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5553 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5554 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5555 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5556 Section Phdr}.
5557
5558 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5559 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5560 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5561 contain the section.
5562
5563 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5564 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5565 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5566 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5567 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5568 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5569 segment at all.
5570
5571 @kindex FILEHDR
5572 @kindex PHDRS
5573 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5574 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5575 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5576 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5577 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5578 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5579 these keywords.
5580
5581 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5582 value of the keyword.
5583
5584 @table @asis
5585 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5586 Indicates an unused program header.
5587
5588 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5589 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5590 the file.
5591
5592 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5593 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5594
5595 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5596 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5597 found.
5598
5599 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5600 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5601
5602 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5603 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5604 ABI.
5605
5606 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5607 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5608
5609 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5610 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5611
5612 @item @var{expression}
5613 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5614 be used for types not defined above.
5615 @end table
5616
5617 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5618 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5619 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5620 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5621 output section attribute.
5622
5623 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5624 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5625 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5626 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5627 header.
5628
5629 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5630 headers used on a native ELF system.
5631
5632 @example
5633 @group
5634 PHDRS
5635 @{
5636 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5637 interp PT_INTERP ;
5638 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5639 data PT_LOAD ;
5640 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5641 @}
5642
5643 SECTIONS
5644 @{
5645 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5646 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5647 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5648 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5649 @dots{}
5650 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5651 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5652 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5653 @dots{}
5654 @}
5655 @end group
5656 @end example
5657
5658 @node VERSION
5659 @section VERSION Command
5660 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5661 @cindex symbol versions
5662 @cindex version script
5663 @cindex versions of symbols
5664 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5665 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5666 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5667 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5668 shared library.
5669
5670 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5671 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5672 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5673
5674 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5675 @smallexample
5676 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5677 @end smallexample
5678
5679 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5680 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5681 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5682 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5683 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5684 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5685 library.
5686
5687 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5688 examples.
5689
5690 @smallexample
5691 VERS_1.1 @{
5692 global:
5693 foo1;
5694 local:
5695 old*;
5696 original*;
5697 new*;
5698 @};
5699
5700 VERS_1.2 @{
5701 foo2;
5702 @} VERS_1.1;
5703
5704 VERS_2.0 @{
5705 bar1; bar2;
5706 extern "C++" @{
5707 ns::*;
5708 "f(int, double)";
5709 @};
5710 @} VERS_1.2;
5711 @end smallexample
5712
5713 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5714 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5715 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5716 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5717 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5718 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5719 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5720 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5721 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5722 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5723
5724 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5725 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5726 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5727
5728 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5729 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5730 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5731
5732 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5733 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5734 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5735 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5736 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5737 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5738 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5739 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5740 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5741
5742 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5743 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5744 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5745 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5746
5747 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5748 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5749 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5750 won't.
5751
5752 @smallexample
5753 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5754 @end smallexample
5755
5756 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5757 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5758 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5759 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5760 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5761 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5762 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5763 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5764 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5765 search for each symbol reference.
5766
5767 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5768 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5769 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5770 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5771 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5772 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5773 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5774 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5775 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5776
5777 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5778 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5779 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5780 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5781 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5782 @smallexample
5783 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5784 @end smallexample
5785 @noindent
5786 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5787 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5788 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5789 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5790 takes precedence over a version script.
5791
5792 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5793 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5794 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5795 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5796 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5797
5798 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5799 source file. Here is an example:
5800
5801 @smallexample
5802 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5803 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5804 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5805 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5806 @end smallexample
5807
5808 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5809 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5810 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5811 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5812
5813 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5814 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5815 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5816 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5817 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5818 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5819
5820 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5821 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5822 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5823 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5824
5825 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5826
5827 @smallexample
5828 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5829 @end smallexample
5830
5831 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5832 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5833 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5834 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5835 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5836
5837 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5838 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5839 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5840 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5841 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5842 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5843 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5844 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5845 expect when you upgrade.
5846
5847 @node Expressions
5848 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5849 @cindex expressions
5850 @cindex arithmetic
5851 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5852 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5853 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5854 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5855
5856 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5857
5858 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5859 expressions.
5860
5861 @menu
5862 * Constants:: Constants
5863 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5864 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5865 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5866 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5867 * Operators:: Operators
5868 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5869 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5870 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5871 @end menu
5872
5873 @node Constants
5874 @subsection Constants
5875 @cindex integer notation
5876 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5877 All constants are integers.
5878
5879 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5880 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5881 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5882 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5883 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5884 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5885
5886 @cindex scaled integers
5887 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5888 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5889 @cindex suffixes for integers
5890 @cindex integer suffixes
5891 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5892 constant by
5893 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5894 @ifnottex
5895 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5896 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5897 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5898 @end ifnottex
5899 @tex
5900 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5901 @end tex
5902 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5903 respectively. For example, the following
5904 all refer to the same quantity:
5905
5906 @smallexample
5907 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5908 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5909 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5910 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5911 @end smallexample
5912
5913 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5914 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5915
5916 @node Symbolic Constants
5917 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5918 @cindex symbolic constants
5919 @kindex CONSTANT
5920 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
5921 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5922
5923 @table @code
5924 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5925 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5926 The target's maximum page size.
5927
5928 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5929 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5930 The target's default page size.
5931 @end table
5932
5933 So for example:
5934
5935 @smallexample
5936 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5937 @end smallexample
5938
5939 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5940 supported by the target.
5941
5942 @node Symbols
5943 @subsection Symbol Names
5944 @cindex symbol names
5945 @cindex names
5946 @cindex quoted symbol names
5947 @kindex "
5948 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5949 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5950 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5951 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5952 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5953 @smallexample
5954 "SECTION" = 9;
5955 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5956 @end smallexample
5957
5958 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5959 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5960 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5961
5962 @node Orphan Sections
5963 @subsection Orphan Sections
5964 @cindex orphan
5965 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5966 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5967 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5968 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5969 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5970
5971 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5972 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5973 placed at the end of that output section.
5974
5975 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5976 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5977 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5978 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5979 one new output section.
5980
5981 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5982 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5983 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5984 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5985 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5986 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5987 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5988
5989 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5990 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5991 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5992
5993 @node Location Counter
5994 @subsection The Location Counter
5995 @kindex .
5996 @cindex dot
5997 @cindex location counter
5998 @cindex current output location
5999 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6000 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6001 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6002 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6003 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6004
6005 @cindex holes
6006 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6007 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6008 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6009 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6010 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6011
6012 @smallexample
6013 SECTIONS
6014 @{
6015 output :
6016 @{
6017 file1(.text)
6018 . = . + 1000;
6019 file2(.text)
6020 . += 1000;
6021 file3(.text)
6022 @} = 0x12345678;
6023 @}
6024 @end smallexample
6025 @noindent
6026 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6027 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6028 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6029 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6030 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6031 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6032
6033 @cindex dot inside sections
6034 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6035 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6036 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6037 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6038 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6039 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6040
6041 @smallexample
6042 SECTIONS
6043 @{
6044 . = 0x100
6045 .text: @{
6046 *(.text)
6047 . = 0x200
6048 @}
6049 . = 0x500
6050 .data: @{
6051 *(.data)
6052 . += 0x600
6053 @}
6054 @}
6055 @end smallexample
6056
6057 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6058 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6059 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6060 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6061 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6062 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6063 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6064 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6065
6066 @cindex dot outside sections
6067 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6068 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6069 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6070
6071 @smallexample
6072 SECTIONS
6073 @{
6074 start_of_text = . ;
6075 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6076 end_of_text = . ;
6077
6078 start_of_data = . ;
6079 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6080 end_of_data = . ;
6081 @}
6082 @end smallexample
6083
6084 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6085 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6086 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6087 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6088 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6089 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6090 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6091 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6092 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6093 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6094 as follows:
6095
6096 @smallexample
6097 SECTIONS
6098 @{
6099 start_of_text = . ;
6100 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6101 end_of_text = . ;
6102
6103 start_of_data = . ;
6104 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6105 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6106 end_of_data = . ;
6107 @}
6108 @end smallexample
6109
6110 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6111 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6112 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6113 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6114 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6115 section. So you could write:
6116
6117 @smallexample
6118 SECTIONS
6119 @{
6120 start_of_text = . ;
6121 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6122 end_of_text = . ;
6123
6124 . = . ;
6125 start_of_data = . ;
6126 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6127 end_of_data = . ;
6128 @}
6129 @end smallexample
6130
6131 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6132 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6133
6134 @need 2000
6135 @node Operators
6136 @subsection Operators
6137 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6138 @cindex arithmetic operators
6139 @cindex precedence in expressions
6140 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6141 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6142 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6143 @ifnottex
6144 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6145 @smallexample
6146 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6147 (highest)
6148 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6149 2 left * / %
6150 3 left + -
6151 4 left >> <<
6152 5 left == != > < <= >=
6153 6 left &
6154 7 left |
6155 8 left &&
6156 9 left ||
6157 10 right ? :
6158 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6159 (lowest)
6160 @end smallexample
6161 Notes:
6162 (1) Prefix operators
6163 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6164 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6165 @end ifnottex
6166 @tex
6167 \vskip \baselineskip
6168 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6169 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6170 \hrule
6171 \halign
6172 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6173 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6174 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6175 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6176 \noalign{\hrule}
6177 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6178 &highest&&&&&\cr
6179 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6180 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6181 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6182 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6183 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6184 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6185 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6186 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6187 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6188 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6189 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6190 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6191 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6192 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6193 \hrule}
6194 @end tex
6195 @iftex
6196 {
6197 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6198 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6199 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6200 }
6201 @end iftex
6202 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6203
6204 @node Evaluation
6205 @subsection Evaluation
6206 @cindex lazy evaluation
6207 @cindex expression evaluation order
6208 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6209 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6210
6211 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6212 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6213 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6214 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6215
6216 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6217 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6218 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6219 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6220
6221 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6222 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6223 allocation.
6224
6225 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6226 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6227
6228 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6229 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6230 following
6231 @smallexample
6232 @group
6233 SECTIONS
6234 @{
6235 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6236 @{ *(.text) @}
6237 @}
6238 @end group
6239 @end smallexample
6240 @noindent
6241 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6242 address}.
6243
6244 @node Expression Section
6245 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6246 @cindex expression sections
6247 @cindex absolute expressions
6248 @cindex relative expressions
6249 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6250 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6251 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6252 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6253 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6254 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6255 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6256 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6257 operations.
6258
6259 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6260 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6261 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6262 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6263 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6264 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6265 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6266 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6267 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6268 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6269 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6270 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6271 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6272 everywhere.
6273
6274 In the following simple example,
6275
6276 @smallexample
6277 @group
6278 SECTIONS
6279 @{
6280 . = 0x100;
6281 __executable_start = 0x100;
6282 .data :
6283 @{
6284 . = 0x10;
6285 __data_start = 0x10;
6286 *(.data)
6287 @}
6288 @dots{}
6289 @}
6290 @end group
6291 @end smallexample
6292
6293 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6294 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6295 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6296 section in the second two assignments.
6297
6298 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6299 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6300
6301 @itemize @bullet
6302 @item
6303 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6304 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6305 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6306 @item
6307 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6308 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6309 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6310 @item
6311 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6312 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6313 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6314 before applying the operator.
6315 @end itemize
6316
6317 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6318
6319 @itemize @bullet
6320 @item
6321 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6322 @item
6323 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6324 @item
6325 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6326 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6327 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6328 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6329 but an absolute address otherwise.
6330 @item
6331 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6332 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6333 section as the relative operand(s).
6334 @item
6335 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6336 conversions) is an absolute address.
6337 @end itemize
6338
6339 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6340 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6341 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6342 section @samp{.data}:
6343 @smallexample
6344 SECTIONS
6345 @{
6346 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6347 @}
6348 @end smallexample
6349 @noindent
6350 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6351 @samp{.data} section.
6352
6353 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6354 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6355
6356 @node Builtin Functions
6357 @subsection Builtin Functions
6358 @cindex functions in expressions
6359 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6360 use in linker script expressions.
6361
6362 @table @code
6363 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6364 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6365 @cindex expression, absolute
6366 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6367 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6368 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6369 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6370
6371 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6372 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6373 @cindex section address in expression
6374 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6375 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6376 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6377 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6378 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6379 the other two will be absolute:
6380 @smallexample
6381 @group
6382 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6383 .output1 :
6384 @{
6385 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6386 @dots{}
6387 @}
6388 .output :
6389 @{
6390 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6391 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6392 @}
6393 @dots{} @}
6394 @end group
6395 @end smallexample
6396
6397 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6398 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6399 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6400 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6401 @cindex round up location counter
6402 @cindex align location counter
6403 @cindex round up expression
6404 @cindex align expression
6405 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6406 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6407 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6408 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6409 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6410 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6411
6412 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6413 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6414 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6415 input sections:
6416 @smallexample
6417 @group
6418 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6419 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6420 *(.data)
6421 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6422 @}
6423 @dots{} @}
6424 @end group
6425 @end smallexample
6426 @noindent
6427 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6428 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6429 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6430 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6431
6432 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6433
6434 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6435 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6436 @cindex section alignment
6437 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6438 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6439 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6440 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6441 value in that section.
6442 @smallexample
6443 @group
6444 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6445 .output @{
6446 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6447 @dots{}
6448 @}
6449 @dots{} @}
6450 @end group
6451 @end smallexample
6452
6453 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6454 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6455 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6456 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6457 section.
6458
6459 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6460 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6461 This is equivalent to either
6462 @smallexample
6463 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6464 @end smallexample
6465 or
6466 @smallexample
6467 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6468 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6469 @end smallexample
6470 @noindent
6471 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6472 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6473 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6474 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6475 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6476 bytes in the on-disk file.
6477
6478 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6479 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6480 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6481 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6482 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6483 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6484 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6485
6486 @noindent
6487 Example:
6488 @smallexample
6489 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6490 @end smallexample
6491
6492 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6493 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6494 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6495 evaluation purposes.
6496
6497 @smallexample
6498 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6499 @end smallexample
6500
6501 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6502 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6503 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6504 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6505 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6506 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6507 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6508 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6509 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6510 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6511 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6512 section alignment.
6513
6514 @smallexample
6515 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6516 @end smallexample
6517
6518 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6519 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6520 @cindex symbol defaults
6521 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6522 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6523 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6524 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6525 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6526 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6527 existed, its value is preserved:
6528
6529 @smallexample
6530 @group
6531 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6532 .text : @{
6533 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6534 @dots{}
6535 @}
6536 @dots{}
6537 @}
6538 @end group
6539 @end smallexample
6540
6541 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6542 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6543 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6544
6545 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6546 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6547 @cindex section load address in expression
6548 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6549 Section LMA}).
6550
6551 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6552 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6553 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6554 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6555
6556 @kindex MAX
6557 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6558 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6559
6560 @kindex MIN
6561 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6562 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6563
6564 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6565 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6566 @cindex unallocated address, next
6567 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6568 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6569 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6570 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6571
6572 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6573 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6574 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6575
6576 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6577 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6578 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6579 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6580 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6581 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6582 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6583 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6584 name.
6585
6586 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6587 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6588 @cindex section size
6589 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6590 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6591 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6592 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6593 @smallexample
6594 @group
6595 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6596 .output @{
6597 .start = . ;
6598 @dots{}
6599 .end = . ;
6600 @}
6601 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6602 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6603 @dots{} @}
6604 @end group
6605 @end smallexample
6606
6607 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6608 @itemx sizeof_headers
6609 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6610 @cindex header size
6611 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6612 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6613 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6614 choose, to facilitate paging.
6615
6616 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6617 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6618 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6619 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6620 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6621 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6622 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6623 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6624 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6625 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6626 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6627 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6628 @end table
6629
6630 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6631 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6632 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6633 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6634 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6635 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6636 linker will report an error.
6637
6638 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6639
6640 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6641 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6642 commands.
6643
6644 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6645 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6646 read. This can affect archive searching.
6647
6648 @ifset GENERIC
6649 @node Machine Dependent
6650 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6651
6652 @cindex machine dependencies
6653 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6654 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6655 functionality are not listed.
6656
6657 @menu
6658 @ifset H8300
6659 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6660 @end ifset
6661 @ifset M68HC11
6662 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6663 @end ifset
6664 @ifset ARM
6665 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6666 @end ifset
6667 @ifset HPPA
6668 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6669 @end ifset
6670 @ifset M68K
6671 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6672 @end ifset
6673 @ifset MIPS
6674 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6675 @end ifset
6676 @ifset MMIX
6677 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6678 @end ifset
6679 @ifset MSP430
6680 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6681 @end ifset
6682 @ifset NDS32
6683 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6684 @end ifset
6685 @ifset NIOSII
6686 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6687 @end ifset
6688 @ifset POWERPC
6689 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6690 @end ifset
6691 @ifset POWERPC64
6692 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6693 @end ifset
6694 @ifset S/390
6695 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6696 @end ifset
6697 @ifset SPU
6698 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6699 @end ifset
6700 @ifset TICOFF
6701 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6702 @end ifset
6703 @ifset WIN32
6704 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6705 @end ifset
6706 @ifset XTENSA
6707 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6708 @end ifset
6709 @end menu
6710 @end ifset
6711
6712 @ifset H8300
6713 @ifclear GENERIC
6714 @raisesections
6715 @end ifclear
6716
6717 @node H8/300
6718 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6719
6720 @cindex H8/300 support
6721 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6722 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6723
6724 @table @emph
6725 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6726 @item relaxing address modes
6727 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6728 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6729 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6730 respectively.
6731
6732 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6733 @item synthesizing instructions
6734 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6735 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6736 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6737 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6738 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6739 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6740 top page of memory).
6741
6742 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6743 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6744 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6745 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6746 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6747 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6748 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6749
6750 @item bit manipulation instructions
6751 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6752 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6753 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6754 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6755 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6756 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6757 the top page of memory).
6758
6759 @item system control instructions
6760 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6761 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6762 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6763 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6764 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6765 the top page of memory).
6766 @end table
6767
6768 @ifclear GENERIC
6769 @lowersections
6770 @end ifclear
6771 @end ifset
6772
6773 @ifclear GENERIC
6774 @ifset Renesas
6775 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6776 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6777 @node Renesas
6778 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6779
6780 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6781 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6782 options are required for these chips.
6783 @end ifset
6784 @end ifclear
6785
6786 @ifset ARM
6787 @ifclear GENERIC
6788 @raisesections
6789 @end ifclear
6790
6791 @ifset M68HC11
6792 @ifclear GENERIC
6793 @raisesections
6794 @end ifclear
6795
6796 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6797 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6798
6799 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6800
6801 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6802
6803 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6804 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6805
6806 @table @emph
6807 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6808 @item relaxing address modes
6809 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6810 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6811 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6812 respectively.
6813
6814 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6815 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6816 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6817
6818 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6819 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6820 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6821 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6822 @code{bset} instructions.
6823
6824 @end table
6825
6826 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6827
6828 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6829 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6830 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6831 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6832 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6833 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6834 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6835 point to the function trampoline.
6836
6837 @ifclear GENERIC
6838 @lowersections
6839 @end ifclear
6840 @end ifset
6841
6842 @node ARM
6843 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6844
6845 @cindex ARM interworking support
6846 @kindex --support-old-code
6847 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6848 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6849 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6850 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6851 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6852 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6853 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6854 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6855 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6856 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6857
6858 @cindex thumb entry point
6859 @cindex entry point, thumb
6860 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6861 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6862 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6863 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6864 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6865 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6866
6867 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6868 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6869 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6870 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6871 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6872 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6873
6874 @cindex BE8
6875 @kindex --be8
6876 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6877 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6878 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6879 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6880 little-endian code.
6881
6882 @cindex TARGET1
6883 @kindex --target1-rel
6884 @kindex --target1-abs
6885 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6886 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6887 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6888 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6889
6890 @cindex TARGET2
6891 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6892 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6893 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6894 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6895 @table @samp
6896 @item rel
6897 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6898 @item abs
6899 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6900 @item got-rel
6901 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6902 @end table
6903
6904 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6905 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6906 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6907 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6908 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6909 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6910
6911 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6912 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6913 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6914
6915 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6916 relocations are ignored.
6917
6918 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6919 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6920 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6921 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6922
6923 @smallexample
6924 TST rM, #1
6925 MOVEQ PC, rM
6926 BX Rn
6927 @end smallexample
6928
6929 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6930 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6931 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6932
6933 @cindex USE_BLX
6934 @kindex --use-blx
6935 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6936 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6937 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6938 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6939 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6940
6941 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6942 specify it if you are using that target.
6943
6944 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6945 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6946 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6947 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6948 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6949 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6950 the support code can read the intended values.
6951
6952 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6953 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6954 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6955 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6956 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6957 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6958
6959 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6960 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6961 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6962 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6963 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6964 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6965
6966 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6967 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6968 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6969 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6970 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6971 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6972 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6973
6974 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6975 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6976 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6977 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6978 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6979 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6980 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6981
6982 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6983 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6984 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6985
6986 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6987 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6988
6989 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6990 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6991 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6992 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6993 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6994 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6995 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6996 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6997
6998 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6999 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7000
7001 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7002 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7003 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7004 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7005 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7006
7007 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7008 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7009 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7010 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7011 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7012 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7013
7014 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7015 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7016
7017 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7018 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7019 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7020 occurs.
7021
7022 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7023 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7024 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7025 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7026 occurs.
7027
7028 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7029 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7030 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7031 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7032 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7033 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7034 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7035 not be diagnosed.
7036
7037 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7038 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7039 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7040 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7041 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7042 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7043 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7044
7045 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7046 @kindex --pic-veneer
7047 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7048 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7049 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7050 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7051
7052 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7053 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7054 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7055 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7056 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7057 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7058 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7059 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7060 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7061 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7062 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7063 where they should be placed.
7064
7065 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7066 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7067 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7068 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7069 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7070 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7071 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7072 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7073 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7074 from the input sections.
7075
7076 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7077 @samp{N = +1}.
7078
7079 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7080 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7081 otherwise.
7082
7083 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7084 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7085 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7086 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7087
7088 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7089
7090 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7091 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7092 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7093 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7094
7095 Please contact ARM for further details.
7096
7097 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7098 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7099 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7100 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7101
7102 @kindex --long-plt
7103 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7104 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7105 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7106 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7107
7108 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7109 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7110 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7111 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7112
7113 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7114 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7115 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7116 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7117 veneers in memory.
7118
7119 @kindex --cmse-implib
7120 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7121 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7122 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7123 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7124 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7125
7126 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7127 @cindex Input import library
7128 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7129 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7130 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7131 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7132 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7133 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7134 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7135 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7136 specified.
7137
7138 @ifclear GENERIC
7139 @lowersections
7140 @end ifclear
7141 @end ifset
7142
7143 @ifset HPPA
7144 @ifclear GENERIC
7145 @raisesections
7146 @end ifclear
7147
7148 @node HPPA ELF32
7149 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7150 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7151 @kindex --multi-subspace
7152 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7153 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7154 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7155 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7156 multiple sub-spaces.
7157
7158 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7159 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7160 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7161 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7162 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7163 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7164 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7165 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7166 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7167 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7168 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7169 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7170 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7171 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7172 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7173 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7174
7175 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7176 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7177 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7178 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7179
7180 @ifclear GENERIC
7181 @lowersections
7182 @end ifclear
7183 @end ifset
7184
7185 @ifset M68K
7186 @ifclear GENERIC
7187 @raisesections
7188 @end ifclear
7189
7190 @node M68K
7191 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7192
7193 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7194 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7195 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7196 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7197 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7198 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7199 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7200 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7201 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7202 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7203 support such GOTs.
7204 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7205 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7206 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7207 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7208
7209 @ifclear GENERIC
7210 @lowersections
7211 @end ifclear
7212 @end ifset
7213
7214 @ifset MIPS
7215 @ifclear GENERIC
7216 @raisesections
7217 @end ifclear
7218
7219 @node MIPS
7220 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7221
7222 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7223 @kindex --insn32
7224 @kindex --no-insn32
7225 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7226 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7227 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7228 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7229 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7230 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7231
7232 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7233 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7234 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7235 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7236 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7237 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7238 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7239 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7240 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7241 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7242 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7243 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7244
7245 @ifclear GENERIC
7246 @lowersections
7247 @end ifclear
7248 @end ifset
7249
7250 @ifset MMIX
7251 @ifclear GENERIC
7252 @raisesections
7253 @end ifclear
7254
7255 @node MMIX
7256 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7257 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7258 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7259 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7260 can translate between the two formats.
7261
7262 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7263 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7264 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7265 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7266 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7267 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7268 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7269 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7270
7271 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7272 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7273 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7274 of a section.
7275
7276 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7277 are left out from an mmo file.
7278
7279 @ifclear GENERIC
7280 @lowersections
7281 @end ifclear
7282 @end ifset
7283
7284 @ifset MSP430
7285 @ifclear GENERIC
7286 @raisesections
7287 @end ifclear
7288
7289 @node MSP430
7290 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7291 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7292 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7293 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7294
7295 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7296 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7297
7298 @table @code
7299 @item @samp{.vectors}
7300 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7301
7302 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7303 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7304 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7305
7306 @item @samp{.infomem}
7307 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7308 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7309
7310 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7311 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7312 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7313
7314 @item @samp{.noinit}
7315 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7316
7317 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7318 @end table
7319
7320 @table @option
7321 @cindex MSP430 Options
7322 @kindex --code-region
7323 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7324 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7325 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7326 using this option.
7327
7328 @kindex --data-region
7329 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7330 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7331 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7332 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7333
7334 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7335 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7336 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7337 and @code{--data-region} options.
7338 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7339 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7340 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7341 @end table
7342
7343 @ifclear GENERIC
7344 @lowersections
7345 @end ifclear
7346 @end ifset
7347
7348 @ifset NDS32
7349 @ifclear GENERIC
7350 @raisesections
7351 @end ifclear
7352
7353 @node NDS32
7354 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7355 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7356 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7357 relaxes objects according to these options.
7358
7359 @table @code
7360 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7361 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7362
7363 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7364 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7365
7366 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7367 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7368
7369 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7370 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7371
7372 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7373 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7374
7375 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7376 Update the existing EX9 table.
7377
7378 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7379 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7380
7381 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7382 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7383
7384 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7385 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7386
7387 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7388 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7389 @end table
7390
7391 @ifclear GENERIC
7392 @lowersections
7393 @end ifclear
7394 @end ifset
7395
7396 @ifset NIOSII
7397 @ifclear GENERIC
7398 @raisesections
7399 @end ifclear
7400
7401 @node Nios II
7402 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7403 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7404 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7405
7406 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7407 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7408 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7409 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7410 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7411 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7412 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7413 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7414 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7415 larger than 256MB.
7416
7417 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7418 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7419 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7420 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7421 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7422 register as a temporary.
7423
7424 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7425 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7426 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7427
7428 @ifclear GENERIC
7429 @lowersections
7430 @end ifclear
7431 @end ifset
7432
7433 @ifset POWERPC
7434 @ifclear GENERIC
7435 @raisesections
7436 @end ifclear
7437
7438 @node PowerPC ELF32
7439 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7440 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7441 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7442 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7443 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7444 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7445 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7446 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7447 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7448 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7449 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7450 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7451 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7452
7453 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7454 @table @option
7455 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7456 @kindex --bss-plt
7457 @item --bss-plt
7458 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7459 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7460 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7461 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7462 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7463 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7464 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7465 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7466
7467 @kindex --secure-plt
7468 @item --secure-plt
7469 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7470 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7471 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7472 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7473 style BSS PLT.
7474
7475 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7476 @kindex --sdata-got
7477 @item --sdata-got
7478 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7479 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7480 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7481 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7482 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7483 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7484 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7485 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7486 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7487 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7488 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7489 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7490
7491 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7492 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7493 @item --emit-stub-syms
7494 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7495 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7496
7497 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7498 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7499 @item --no-tls-optimize
7500 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7501 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7502 disable the optimization.
7503 @end table
7504
7505 @ifclear GENERIC
7506 @lowersections
7507 @end ifclear
7508 @end ifset
7509
7510 @ifset POWERPC64
7511 @ifclear GENERIC
7512 @raisesections
7513 @end ifclear
7514
7515 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7516 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7517
7518 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7519 @table @option
7520 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7521 @kindex --stub-group-size
7522 @item --stub-group-size
7523 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7524 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7525 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7526 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7527 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7528 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7529 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7530 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7531 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7532 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7533 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7534 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7535 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7536 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7537
7538 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7539 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7540 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7541 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7542
7543 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7544 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7545 @item --emit-stub-syms
7546 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7547 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7548
7549 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7550 @kindex --dotsyms
7551 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7552 @item --dotsyms
7553 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7554 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7555 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7556 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7557 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7558 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7559 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7560 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7561 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7562 feature.
7563
7564 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7565 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7566 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7567 @item --save-restore-funcs
7568 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7569 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7570 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7571 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7572 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7573 link.
7574
7575 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7576 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7577 @item --no-tls-optimize
7578 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7579 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7580 disable the optimization.
7581
7582 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7583 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7584 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7585 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7586 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7587 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7588 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7589 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7590 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7591 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7592 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7593 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7594 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7595 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7596 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7597
7598 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7599 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7600 @item --no-opd-optimize
7601 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7602 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7603 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7604 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7605
7606 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7607 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7608 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7609 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7610 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7611 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7612 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7613
7614 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7615 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7616 @item --no-toc-optimize
7617 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7618 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7619 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7620 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7621 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7622 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7623 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7624 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7625 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7626 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7627 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7628 optimization.
7629
7630 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7631 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7632 @item --no-multi-toc
7633 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7634 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7635 where TOC
7636 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7637 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7638 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7639 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7640 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7641 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7642 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7643 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7644
7645 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7646 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7647 @item --no-toc-sort
7648 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7649 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7650 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7651 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7652 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7653 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7654 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7655 off this feature.
7656
7657 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7658 @kindex --plt-align
7659 @kindex --no-plt-align
7660 @item --plt-align
7661 @itemx --no-plt-align
7662 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7663 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7664 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7665 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7666 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7667 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7668 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7669
7670 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7671 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7672 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7673 @item --plt-static-chain
7674 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7675 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7676 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7677 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7678
7679 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7680 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7681 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7682 @item --plt-thread-safe
7683 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7684 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7685 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7686 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7687 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7688 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7689 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7690 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7691 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7692 default behaviour.
7693
7694 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7695 @kindex --plt-localentry
7696 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7697 @item --plt-localentry
7698 @itemx --no-localentry
7699 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7700 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7701 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7702 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7703 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7704 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7705 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7706 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7707 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7708 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7709 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7710 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7711 @end table
7712
7713 @ifclear GENERIC
7714 @lowersections
7715 @end ifclear
7716 @end ifset
7717
7718 @ifset S/390
7719 @ifclear GENERIC
7720 @raisesections
7721 @end ifclear
7722
7723 @node S/390 ELF
7724 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7725
7726 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7727 @table @option
7728
7729 @cindex S/390
7730 @kindex --s390-pgste
7731 @item --s390-pgste
7732 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7733 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7734 binaries marked that way.
7735 @end table
7736
7737 @ifclear GENERIC
7738 @lowersections
7739 @end ifclear
7740 @end ifset
7741
7742 @ifset SPU
7743 @ifclear GENERIC
7744 @raisesections
7745 @end ifclear
7746
7747 @node SPU ELF
7748 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7749
7750 @cindex SPU ELF options
7751 @table @option
7752
7753 @cindex SPU plugins
7754 @kindex --plugin
7755 @item --plugin
7756 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7757
7758 @cindex SPU overlays
7759 @kindex --no-overlays
7760 @item --no-overlays
7761 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7762 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7763 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7764 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7765
7766 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7767 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7768 @item --emit-stub-syms
7769 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7770 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7771
7772 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7773 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7774 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7775 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7776 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7777 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7778
7779 @cindex SPU local store size
7780 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7781 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7782 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7783 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7784 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7785
7786 @cindex SPU
7787 @kindex --stack-analysis
7788 @item --stack-analysis
7789 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7790 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7791 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7792 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7793 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7794 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7795 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7796 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7797 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7798 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7799 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7800 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7801 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7802 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7803 and calls will be given.
7804
7805 @cindex SPU
7806 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7807 @item --emit-stack-syms
7808 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7809 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7810 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7811 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7812 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7813 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7814 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7815 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7816 @end table
7817
7818 @ifclear GENERIC
7819 @lowersections
7820 @end ifclear
7821 @end ifset
7822
7823 @ifset TICOFF
7824 @ifclear GENERIC
7825 @raisesections
7826 @end ifclear
7827
7828 @node TI COFF
7829 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7830 @cindex TI COFF versions
7831 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7832 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7833 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7834 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7835 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7836 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7837
7838 @ifclear GENERIC
7839 @lowersections
7840 @end ifclear
7841 @end ifset
7842
7843 @ifset WIN32
7844 @ifclear GENERIC
7845 @raisesections
7846 @end ifclear
7847
7848 @node WIN32
7849 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7850
7851 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7852 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7853 command-line options mentioned here.
7854
7855 @table @emph
7856 @cindex import libraries
7857 @item import libraries
7858 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7859 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7860 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7861 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7862 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7863 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7864
7865 @item exporting DLL symbols
7866 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7867 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7868
7869 @table @emph
7870 @item using auto-export functionality
7871 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7872 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7873 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7874
7875 @itemize
7876 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7877 @item --exclude-symbols
7878 @item --exclude-libs
7879 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7880 @item --version-script
7881 @end itemize
7882
7883 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7884 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7885 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7886 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7887 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7888 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7889 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7890 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7891
7892 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7893 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7894 if either of the following are true:
7895
7896 @itemize
7897 @item A DEF file is used.
7898 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7899 @end itemize
7900
7901 @item using a DEF file
7902 @cindex using a DEF file
7903 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7904 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7905 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7906 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7907 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7908
7909 @example
7910 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7911 @end example
7912
7913 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7914 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7915
7916 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7917
7918 @example
7919 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7920
7921 EXPORTS
7922 foo
7923 bar
7924 _bar = bar
7925 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7926 var1 DATA
7927 doo = foo == foo2
7928 eoo DATA == var1
7929 @end example
7930
7931 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7932 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7933 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7934 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7935 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7936 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7937 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7938 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7939 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7940
7941 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7942 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7943 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7944
7945 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7946 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7947 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7948 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7949
7950 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7951 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7952 non-default base address for the image.
7953
7954 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7955 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7956 filename specified on the command line.
7957
7958 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7959
7960 @example
7961 EXPORTS
7962 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7963 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7964 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7965 @end example
7966
7967 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7968 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7969 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7970 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7971 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7972 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7973 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7974
7975 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7976
7977 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7978 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7979 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7980 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7981 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7982
7983 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7984 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7985 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7986 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7987
7988 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7989 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7990 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7991 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7992 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7993 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7994 application will behave unexpectedly.
7995
7996 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7997 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7998 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7999 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8000 the DLL without an import library.
8001
8002 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8003 other DEF file statements
8004
8005 @cindex creating a DEF file
8006 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8007 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8008
8009 @item Using decorations
8010 @cindex Using decorations
8011 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8012 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8013 declared as:
8014
8015 @example
8016 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8017 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8018 @end example
8019
8020 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8021 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8022 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8023 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8024
8025 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8026 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8027 instead:
8028
8029 @example
8030 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8031 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8032 @end example
8033
8034 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8035 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8036 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8037 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8038 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8039 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8040 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8041 information.
8042 @end table
8043
8044 @cindex automatic data imports
8045 @item automatic data imports
8046 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8047 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8048 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8049 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8050 code to these platforms, especially for large
8051 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8052 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8053 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8054 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8055 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8056 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8057 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8058 trigger the feature's use.
8059
8060 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8061 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8062
8063 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8064 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8065
8066 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8067 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8068 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8069 below.
8070
8071 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8072 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8073 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8074 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8075 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8076 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8077 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8078 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8079 references.
8080
8081 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8082 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8083 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8084 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8085 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8086 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8087 run without error on an older system.
8088
8089 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8090 enabled as needed.
8091
8092 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8093 @item direct linking to a dll
8094 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8095 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8096 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8097 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8098 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8099 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8100 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8101 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8102 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8103 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8104
8105 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8106 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8107 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8108 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8109 select the dll instead of an import library.
8110
8111
8112 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8113 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8114
8115 @example
8116 libxxx.dll.a
8117 xxx.dll.a
8118 libxxx.a
8119 xxx.lib
8120 libxxx.lib
8121 cygxxx.dll (*)
8122 libxxx.dll
8123 xxx.dll
8124 @end example
8125
8126 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8127
8128 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8129 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8130 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8131 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8132 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8133
8134 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8135 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8136 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8137 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8138 could coexist on the same machine.
8139
8140 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8141 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8142 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8143
8144 @example
8145 bin/
8146 cygxxx.dll
8147 lib/
8148 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8149 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8150 @end example
8151
8152 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8153 done two ways:
8154
8155 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8156 @example
8157 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8158 @end example
8159
8160 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8161 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8162 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8163 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8164
8165 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8166 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8167 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8168 making the app/dll.
8169
8170 @example
8171 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8172 @end example
8173
8174 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8175
8176 @example
8177 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8178 @end example
8179
8180 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8181 perfectly legal
8182
8183 @example
8184 bin/
8185 cygxxx-5.dll
8186 lib/
8187 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8188 @end example
8189
8190 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8191 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8192 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8193
8194 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8195 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8196
8197 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8198 work with auto-imported data.
8199
8200 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8201 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8202 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8203 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8204 possible to do this without an import lib.
8205
8206 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8207 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8208 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8209 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8210
8211 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8212 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8213 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8214 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8215 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8216 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8217 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8218
8219 @item symbol aliasing
8220 @table @emph
8221 @item adding additional names
8222 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8223 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8224 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8225 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8226 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8227
8228 @example
8229 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8230
8231 EXPORTS
8232 foo
8233 _foo = foo
8234 @end example
8235
8236 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8237
8238 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8239 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8240
8241 @example
8242 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8243 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8244 @end example
8245
8246 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8247 symbols.
8248
8249 @item renaming symbols
8250 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8251 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8252 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8253 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8254 created). In the following example:
8255
8256 @example
8257 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8258
8259 EXPORTS
8260 _foo = foo
8261 @end example
8262
8263 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8264 @samp{_foo}.
8265 @end table
8266
8267 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8268 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8269 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8270 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8271 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8272 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8273 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8274 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8275 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8276 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8277 which is probably not what you wanted.
8278
8279 @cindex weak externals
8280 @item weak externals
8281 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8282 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8283 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8284 are three variants of weak externals:
8285 @itemize
8286 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8287 called lazy externals.
8288 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8289 This form is not presently implemented.
8290 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8291 implemented.
8292 @end itemize
8293 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8294 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8295 uses a default value.
8296
8297 @cindex aligned common symbols
8298 @item aligned common symbols
8299 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8300 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8301 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8302 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8303 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8304 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8305 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8306 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8307
8308 @end table
8309
8310 @ifclear GENERIC
8311 @lowersections
8312 @end ifclear
8313 @end ifset
8314
8315 @ifset XTENSA
8316 @ifclear GENERIC
8317 @raisesections
8318 @end ifclear
8319
8320 @node Xtensa
8321 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8322
8323 @cindex Xtensa processors
8324 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8325 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8326 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8327 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8328 example, with the command:
8329
8330 @smallexample
8331 SECTIONS
8332 @{
8333 .text : @{
8334 *(.literal .text)
8335 @}
8336 @}
8337 @end smallexample
8338
8339 @noindent
8340 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8341 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8342 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8343 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8344 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8345 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8346 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8347
8348 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8349 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8350 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8351 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8352 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8353 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8354 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8355 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8356 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8357 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8358 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8359 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8360
8361 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8362 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8363 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8364 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8365 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8366 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8367 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8368 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8369 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8370 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8371 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8372 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8373 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8374 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8375
8376 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8377 control the linker:
8378
8379 @cindex Xtensa options
8380 @table @option
8381 @item --size-opt
8382 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8383 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8384 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8385 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8386 preserve the correctness of the code.
8387 @end table
8388
8389 @ifclear GENERIC
8390 @lowersections
8391 @end ifclear
8392 @end ifset
8393
8394 @ifclear SingleFormat
8395 @node BFD
8396 @chapter BFD
8397
8398 @cindex back end
8399 @cindex object file management
8400 @cindex object formats available
8401 @kindex objdump -i
8402 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8403 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8404 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8405 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8406 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8407 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8408 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8409 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8410 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8411
8412 @cindex BFD requirements
8413 @cindex requirements for BFD
8414 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8415 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8416 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8417 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8418 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8419 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8420 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8421
8422 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8423 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8424 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8425 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8426
8427 @menu
8428 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8429 @end menu
8430
8431 @node BFD outline
8432 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8433 @cindex opening object files
8434 @include bfdsumm.texi
8435 @end ifclear
8436
8437 @node Reporting Bugs
8438 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8439 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8440 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8441
8442 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8443
8444 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8445 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8446 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8447 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8448 @command{ld}.
8449
8450 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8451 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8452
8453 @menu
8454 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8455 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8456 @end menu
8457
8458 @node Bug Criteria
8459 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8460 @cindex bug criteria
8461
8462 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8463
8464 @itemize @bullet
8465 @cindex fatal signal
8466 @cindex linker crash
8467 @cindex crash of linker
8468 @item
8469 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8470 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8471
8472 @cindex error on valid input
8473 @item
8474 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8475
8476 @cindex invalid input
8477 @item
8478 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8479 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8480 object files are correct.
8481
8482 @item
8483 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8484 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8485 @end itemize
8486
8487 @node Bug Reporting
8488 @section How to Report Bugs
8489 @cindex bug reports
8490 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8491
8492 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8493 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8494 recommend you contact that organization first.
8495
8496 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8497 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8498 distribution.
8499
8500 @ifset BUGURL
8501 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8502 @value{BUGURL}.
8503 @end ifset
8504
8505 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8506 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8507 fact or leave it out, state it!
8508
8509 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8510 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8511 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8512 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8513 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8514 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8515 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8516 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8517 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8518 and the most helpful.
8519
8520 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8521 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8522 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8523
8524 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8525 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8526 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8527 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8528
8529 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8530
8531 @itemize @bullet
8532 @item
8533 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8534 the @samp{--version} argument.
8535
8536 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8537 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8538
8539 @item
8540 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8541 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8542
8543 @item
8544 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8545 version number.
8546
8547 @item
8548 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8549 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8550
8551 @item
8552 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8553 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8554 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8555 sufficient.
8556
8557 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8558 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8559
8560 @item
8561 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8562 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8563 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8564 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8565 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8566 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8567 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8568 attachments are best.
8569
8570 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8571 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8572 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8573 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8574 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8575
8576 @item
8577 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8578 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8579
8580 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8581 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8582 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8583 a chance to make a mistake.
8584
8585 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8586 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8587 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8588 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8589 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8590 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8591 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8592 any conclusion from our observations.
8593
8594 @item
8595 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8596 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8597 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8598 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8599 context, not by line number.
8600
8601 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8602 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8603 @end itemize
8604
8605 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8606
8607 @itemize @bullet
8608 @item
8609 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8610
8611 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8612 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8613 changes will not affect it.
8614
8615 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8616 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8617 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8618 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8619
8620 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8621 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8622 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8623 less time, and so on.
8624
8625 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8626 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8627
8628 @item
8629 A patch for the bug.
8630
8631 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8632 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8633 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8634 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8635
8636 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8637 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8638 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8639 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8640 fixed.
8641
8642 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8643 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8644 help us to understand.
8645
8646 @item
8647 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8648
8649 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8650 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8651 @end itemize
8652
8653 @node MRI
8654 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8655 @cindex MRI compatibility
8656 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8657 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8658 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8659 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8660 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8661 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8662 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8663
8664 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8665 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8666 features to make use of them.
8667
8668 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8669 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8670
8671 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8672 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8673 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8674 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8675 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8676
8677 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8678
8679 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8680 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8681 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8682
8683 @table @code
8684 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8685 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8686 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8687 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8688 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8689 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8690 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8691 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8692 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8693 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8694 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8695
8696 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8697 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8698 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8699 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8700
8701 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8702
8703 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8704 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8705 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8706 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8707
8708 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8709 @item BASE @var{expression}
8710 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8711 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8712
8713 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8714 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8715 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8716 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8717
8718 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8719 @item END
8720 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8721
8722 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8723 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8724 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8725 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8726
8727 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8728 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8729 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8730 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8731
8732 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8733 same line, with no change in its effect.
8734
8735 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8736 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8737 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8738 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8739 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8740 command line.
8741
8742 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8743 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8744 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8745 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8746 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8747
8748 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8749 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8750 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8751 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8752 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8753 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8754 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8755 file, in the order specified.
8756
8757 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8758 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8759 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8760 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8761 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8762 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8763
8764 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8765 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8766 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8767 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8768 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8769 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8770 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8771 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8772 @end table
8773
8774 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8775 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8776 @include fdl.texi
8777
8778 @node LD Index
8779 @unnumbered LD Index
8780
8781 @printindex cp
8782
8783 @tex
8784 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8785 % meantime:
8786 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8787 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8788 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8789 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8790 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8791 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8792 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8793 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8794 \page\colophon
8795 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8796 @end tex
8797
8798 @bye
This page took 0.268932 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.